(a) Parties to the reorganization. The plan of reorganization must be adopted by each of the corporations that are parties thereto. Each such corporation must include a statement entitled, ``STATEMENT PURSUANT TO Sec. 1.368-3(a) BY [INSERT NAME AND EMPLOYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (IF ANY) OF TAXPAYER], A CORPORATION A PARTY TO A REORGANIZATION,'' on or with its return for the taxable year of the exchange. If any such corporation is a controlled foreign corporation (within the meaning of section 957), each United States shareholder (within the meaning of section 951(b)) with respect thereto must include this statement on or with its return. However, it is not necessary for any taxpayer to include more than one such statement on or with the same return for the same reorganization. The statement must include--
(1) The names and employer identification numbers (if any) of all such parties;
(2) The date of the reorganization;
(3) The aggregate fair market value and basis, determined immediately before the exchange, of the assets, stock or securities of the target corporation transferred in the transaction; and
(4) The date and control number of any private letter ruling(s) issued by the Internal Revenue Service in connection with this reorganization.
(b) Significant holders. Every significant holder, other than a corporation a party to the reorganization, must include a statement entitled, ``STATEMENT PURSUANT TO Sec. 1.368-3(b) BY [INSERT NAME AND TAXPAYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (IF ANY) OF TAXPAYER], A SIGNIFICANT HOLDER,'' on or with such holder's return for the taxable year of the exchange. If a significant holder is a controlled foreign corporation (within the meaning of section 957), each United States shareholder (within the meaning of section 951(b)) with respect thereto must include this statement on or with its return. The statement must include--
(1) The names and employer identification numbers (if any) of all of the parties to the reorganization;
(2) The date of the reorganization; and
(3) The fair market value, determined immediately before the exchange, of all the stock or securities of the target corporation held by the significant holder that is transferred in the transaction and such holder's basis, determined immediately before the exchange, in the stock or securities of such target corporation.
(c) Definitions. For purposes of this section:
(1) Significant holder means--
(i) A holder of stock of the target corporation that receives stock or securities in an exchange described in section 354 (or so much of section 356 as relates to section 354) if, immediately before the exchange, such holder--
(A) Owned at least five percent (by vote or value) of the total outstanding stock of the target corporation if the stock owned by such holder is publicly traded; or
(B) Owned at least one percent (by vote or value) of the total outstanding stock of the target corporation if the stock owned by such holder is not publicly traded; or
(ii) A holder of securities of the target corporation that receives stock or securities in an exchange described in section 354 (or so much of section 356 as relates to section 354) if, immediately before the exchange, such holder owned securities in such target corporation with a basis of $1,000,000 or more.
(2) Publicly traded stock means stock that is listed on--
(i) A national securities exchange registered under section 6 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78f); or
(ii) An interdealer quotation system sponsored by a national securities association registered under section 15A of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (15 U.S.C. 78o-3).
(d) Substantiation information. Under Sec. 1.6001-1(e), taxpayers are required to retain their permanent records and make such records available to any authorized Internal Revenue Service officers and employees. In connection with the reorganization described in this section, these records should specifically include information regarding the amount, basis, and fair market value of all transferred property, and relevant facts regarding any liabilities assumed or extinguished as part of such reorganization.
(e) Effective/applicability date. This section applies to any taxable year beginning on or after May 30, 2006. However, taxpayers may apply this section to any original Federal income tax return (including any amended return filed on or before the due date (including extensions) of such original return) timely filed on or after May 30, 2006. For taxable years beginning before May 30, 2006, see Sec. 1.368-3 as contained in 26 CFR part 1 in effect on April 1, 2006. [T.D. 9329, 72 FR 32800, June 14, 2007]
Insolvency Reorganizations
Carryovers Sec. 1.381(a)-1 General rule relating to carryovers in certain corporate acquisitions.
(a) Allowance of carryovers. Section 381 provides that a corporation which acquires the assets of another corporation in certain liquidations and reorganizations shall succeed to, and take into account, as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, the items described in section 381(c) of the distributor or transferor corporation. These items shall be taken into account by the acquiring corporation subject to the conditions and limitations specified in sections 381, 382(b), and 383 and the regulations thereunder.
(b) Determination of transactions and items to which section 381 applies--(1) Qualified transactions. Except to the extent provided in section 381(c)(20), relating to the carryover of unused pension trust deductions in certain liquidations, the items described in section 381(c) are required by section 381 to be carried over to the acquiring corporation (as defined in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph) only in the following liquidations and reorganizations:
(1) Qualified transactions. Except to the extent provided in section 381(c)(20), relating to the carryover of unused pension trust deductions in certain liquidations, the items described in section 381(c) are required by section 381 to be carried over to the acquiring corporation (as defined in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph) only in the following liquidations and reorganizations:
(i) The complete liquidation of a subsidiary corporation upon which no gain or loss is recognized in accordance with the provisions of section 332;
(ii) A statutory merger or consolidation qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(A) to which section 361 applies;
(iii) A reorganization qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(C);
(iv) A reorganization qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(D) if the requirements of section 354(b)(1)(A) and (B) are satisfied; and
(v) A mere change in identity, form, or place of organization qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(F).
(2) Acquiring corporation defined. (i) Only a single corporation may be an acquiring corporation for purposes of section 381 and the regulations thereunder. The corporation which acquires the assets of its subsidiary corporation in a complete liquidation to which section 381(a)(1) applies is the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 381. In a transaction to which section 381(a)(2) applies, the acquiring corporation is the corporation that, pursuant to the plan of reorganization, directly acquires the assets transferred by the transferor corporation, even if that corporation ultimately retains none of the assets so transferred.
(i) Only a single corporation may be an acquiring corporation for purposes of section 381 and the regulations thereunder. The corporation which acquires the assets of its subsidiary corporation in a complete liquidation to which section 381(a)(1) applies is the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 381. In a transaction to which section 381(a)(2) applies, the acquiring corporation is the corporation that, pursuant to the plan of reorganization, directly acquires the assets transferred by the transferor corporation, even if that corporation ultimately retains none of the assets so transferred.
(ii) The application of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:
Example 1. Y Corporation, a wholly-owned subsidiary of X Corporation, directly acquired all the assets of Z Corporation solely in exchange for voting stock of X Corporation in a transaction qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(C). Y Corporation is the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 381.
Example 2. X Corporation acquired all the assets of Z Corporation solely in exchange for voting stock of X Corporation in a transaction qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(C). Thereafter, pursuant to the plan of reorganization X Corporation transferred all the assets so acquired to Y Corporation, its wholly-owned subsidiary (see section 368(a)(2)(C)). X Corporation is the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 381.
Example 3. X Corporation acquired all the assets of Z Corporation solely in exchange for the voting stock of X Corporation in a transaction qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(C). Thereafter, pursuant to the plan of reorganization X Corporation transferred one-half of the assets so acquired to Y Corporation, its wholly-owned subsidiary, and retained the other half of such assets. X Corporation is the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 381.
Example 4. X Corporation acquired all the assets of Z Corporation solely in exchange for voting stock of X Corporation in a transaction qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(C). Thereafter, pursuant to the plan of reorganization X Corporation transferred one-half of the assets so acquired to Y Corporation, its wholly-owned subsidiary, and the other half of such assets to M Corporation, another wholly-owned subsidiary of X Corporation. X Corporation is the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 381.
(3) Transactions and items not covered by section 381. Section 381 does not apply to partial liquidations, divisive reorganizations, or other transactions not described in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph. Moreover, section 381 does not apply to the carryover of an item or tax attribute not specified in subsection (c) thereof. In a case where section 381 does not apply to a transaction, item, or tax attribute by reason of either of the preceding sentences, no inference is to be drawn from the provisions of section 381 as to whether any item or tax attribute shall be taken into account by the successor corporation.
(c) Foreign corporations. For additional rules involving foreign corporations, see Sec. Sec. 1.367(b)-7 through 1.367(b)-9.
(d) Internal Revenue Code of 1939. Any reference in the regulations under section 381 to any provision of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954 shall, where appropriate, be deemed also to refer to the corresponding provision of the Internal Revenue Code of 1939.
(e) Effective/applicability date. The rules of paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section apply to corporate reorganizations and tax-free liquidations described in section 381(a) that occur on or after August 31, 2011. The last sentence of paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section and Example 2 of paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section apply to transactions occurring on or after November 10, 2014. [T.D. 6500, 25 FR 11607, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended by T.D. 7343, 40 FR 1698, Jan. 9, 1975; T.D. 9273, 71 FR 44914, Aug. 8, 2006; T.D. 9534, 76 FR 45675, Aug. 1, 2011; T.D. 9700; 79 FR 66617, Nov. 10, 2014] Sec. 1.381(b)-1 Operating rules applicable to carryovers in certain corporate acquisitions.
(a) Closing of taxable year--(1) In general. Except in the case of certain reorganizations qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(F), the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation shall end with the close of the date of distribution or transfer. With regard to the closing of the taxable year of the transferor corporation in certain reorganizations under section 368(a)(1)(F) involving a foreign corporation after December 31, 1986, see Sec. Sec. 1.367(a)-1T(e) and 1.367(b)-2(f).
(1) In general. Except in the case of certain reorganizations qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(F), the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation shall end with the close of the date of distribution or transfer. With regard to the closing of the taxable year of the transferor corporation in certain reorganizations under section 368(a)(1)(F) involving a foreign corporation after December 31, 1986, see Sec. Sec. 1.367(a)-1T(e) and 1.367(b)-2(f).
(2) Reorganizations under section 368(a)(1)(F). In the case of a reorganization qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(F) (whether or not such reorganization also qualifies under any other provision of section 368(a)(1)), the acquiring corporation shall be treated (for purposes of section 381) just as the transferor corporation would have been treated if there had been no reorganization. Thus, the taxable year of the transferor corporation shall not end on the date of transfer merely because of the transfer; a net operating loss of the acquiring corporation for any taxable year ending after the date of transfer shall be carried back in accordance with section 172(b) in computing the taxable income of the transferor corporation for a taxable year ending before the date of transfer; and the tax attributes of the transferor corporation enumerated in section 381(c) shall be taken into account by the acquiring corporation as if there had been no reorganization.
(b) Date of distribution or transfer. (1) The date of distribution or transfer shall be that day on which are distributed or transferred all those properties of the distributor or transferor corporation which are to be distributed or transferred pursuant to a liquidation or reorganization described in paragraph (b)(1) of Sec. 1.381(a)-1. If the distribution or transfer of all such properties is not made on one day, then, except as provided in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the date of distribution or transfer shall be that day on which the distribution or transfer of all such properties is completed.
(1) The date of distribution or transfer shall be that day on which are distributed or transferred all those properties of the distributor or transferor corporation which are to be distributed or transferred pursuant to a liquidation or reorganization described in paragraph (b)(1) of Sec. 1.381(a)-1. If the distribution or transfer of all such properties is not made on one day, then, except as provided in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, the date of distribution or transfer shall be that day on which the distribution or transfer of all such properties is completed.
(2) If the distributor or transferor and acquiring corporations file the statements described in subparagraph (3) of this paragraph, the date of distribution or transfer shall be that day as of which (i) substantially all of the properties to be distributed or transferred have been distributed or transferred, and (ii) the distributor or transferor corporation has ceased all operations (other than liquidating activities). Such day also shall be the date of distribution or transfer if the completion of the distribution or transfer is unreasonably postponed beyond the date as of which substantially all the properties to be distributed or transferred have been distributed or transferred and the distributor or transferor corporation has ceased all operations other than liquidating activities. A corporation shall be considered to have distributed or transferred substantially all of its properties to be distributed or transferred even though it retains money or other property in a reasonable amount to pay outstanding debts or preserve the corporation's legal existence. A corporation shall be considered to have ceased all operations, other than liquidating activities, when it ceases to be a going concern and its activities are merely for the purpose of winding up its affairs, paying its debts, and distributing any remaining balance of its money or other properties to its shareholders.
(3) Election--(i) Content of statements. The statements referred to in paragraph (b)(2) of this section must be entitled, ``ELECTION OF DATE OF DISTRIBUTION OR TRANSFER PURSUANT TO Sec. 1.381(b)-1(b)(2),'' and must include: [INSERT NAME AND EMPLOYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (IF ANY) OF DISTRIBUTOR OR TRANSFEROR CORPORATION] AND [INSERT NAME AND EMPLOYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (IF ANY) OF ACQUIRING CORPORATION] ELECT TO DETERMINE THE DATE OF DISTRIBUTION OR TRANSFER UNDER Sec. 1.381(b)-1(b)(2). SUCH DATE IS [INSERT DATE (mm/dd/yyyy)].
(i) Content of statements. The statements referred to in paragraph (b)(2) of this section must be entitled, ``ELECTION OF DATE OF DISTRIBUTION OR TRANSFER PURSUANT TO Sec. 1.381(b)-1(b)(2),'' and must include: [INSERT NAME AND EMPLOYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (IF ANY) OF DISTRIBUTOR OR TRANSFEROR CORPORATION] AND [INSERT NAME AND EMPLOYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (IF ANY) OF ACQUIRING CORPORATION] ELECT TO DETERMINE THE DATE OF DISTRIBUTION OR TRANSFER UNDER Sec. 1.381(b)-1(b)(2). SUCH DATE IS [INSERT DATE (mm/dd/yyyy)].
(ii) Filing of statements. One statement must be included on or with the timely filed Federal income tax return of the distributor or transferor corporation for its taxable year ending with the date of distribution or transfer. An identical statement must be included on or with the timely filed Federal income tax return of the acquiring corporation for its first taxable year ending after that date. If the distributor or transferor corporation, or the acquiring corporation, is a controlled foreign corporation (within the meaning of section 957), each United States shareholder (within the meaning of section 951(b)) with respect thereto must include this statement on or with its return.
(4) If--
(i) The last day of the acquiring corporation's taxable year is a Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday, and
(ii) The day specified in subparagraph (1) or (2) of this paragraph as the date of distribution or transfer is the last business day before such Saturday, Sunday, or holiday, then the last day of the acquiring corporation's taxable year shall be the date of distribution or transfer for purposes of section 381(b) and this section. For purposes of this subparagraph, the term business day means a day which is not a Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday, and also means a Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday if the date of distribution or transfer determined under subparagraph (1) or (2) of this paragraph is such Saturday, Sunday, or holiday.
(c) Return of distributor or transferor corporation. The distributor or transferor corporation shall file an income tax return for the taxable year ending with the date of distribution or transfer described in paragraph (b) of this section. If the distributor or transferor corporation remains in existence after such date of distribution or transfer, it shall file an income tax return for the taxable year beginning on the day following the date of distribution or transfer and ending with the date on which the distributor or transferor corporation's taxable year would have ended if there had been no distribution or transfer.
(d) Carryback of net operating losses. For provisions relating to the carryback of net operating losses of the acquiring corporation, see paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-1.
(e) Effective/applicability date. Paragraph (b)(3) of this section applies to any taxable year beginning on or after May 30, 2006. However, taxpayers may apply paragraph (b)(3) of this section to any original Federal income tax return (including any amended return filed on or before the due date (including extensions) of such original return) timely filed on or after May 30, 2006. For taxable years beginning before May 30, 2006, see Sec. 1.381(b)-1 as contained in 26 CFR part 1 in effect on April 1, 2006. [T.D. 6500, 25 FR 11607, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended at T.D. 8280, 55 FR 1417, Jan. 16, 1990; T.D. 8862, 65 FR 3609, Jan. 24, 2000; T.D. 9264, 71 FR 30598, May 30, 2006; T.D. 9329, 72 FR 32801, June 14, 2007] Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-1 Net operating loss carryovers in certain corporate acquisitions.
(a) Carryover requirement. (1) Section 381(c)(1) requires the acquiring corporation to succeed to, and take into account, the net operating loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation. To determine the amount of these carryovers as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, and to integrate them with any carryovers and carrybacks of the acquiring corporation for purposes of determining the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for taxable years ending after the date of distribution or transfer, it is necessary to apply the provisions of section 172 in accordance with the conditions and limitations of section 381(c)(1) and this section. See also section 382(b) and the regulations thereunder.
(1) Section 381(c)(1) requires the acquiring corporation to succeed to, and take into account, the net operating loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation. To determine the amount of these carryovers as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, and to integrate them with any carryovers and carrybacks of the acquiring corporation for purposes of determining the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for taxable years ending after the date of distribution or transfer, it is necessary to apply the provisions of section 172 in accordance with the conditions and limitations of section 381(c)(1) and this section. See also section 382(b) and the regulations thereunder.
(2) The net operating loss carryovers and carrybacks of the acquiring corporation determined as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall be computed without reference to any net operating loss of a distributor or transferor corporation. The net operating loss carryovers of a distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall be determined without reference to any net operating loss of the acquiring corporation.
(3) For purposes of the tax imposed under section 56, the acquiring corporation succeeding to and taking into account any net operating loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation shall also succeed to and take into account along with such net operating loss carryforward any deferred tax liability under section 56(b) and the regulations thereunder attributable to such net operating loss carryover.
(b) Carryback of net operating losses. A net operating loss of the acquiring corporation for any taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer shall not be carried back in computing the taxable income of a distributor or transferor corporation. However, a net operating loss of the acquiring corporation for any such taxable year shall be carried back in accordance with section 172(b) in computing the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for a taxable year ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer. If a distributor or transferor corporation remains in existence after the date of distribution or transfer, a net operating loss sustained by it for any taxable year beginning after such date shall be carried back in accordance with section 172(b) in computing the taxable income of such corporation for a taxable year ending on or before that date, but may not be carried back or over in computing the taxable income of the acquiring corporation. This paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:
Example 1. On December 31, 1954, X Corporation merged into Y Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies, and the charter of Y Corporation continued after the merger. Y Corporation sustained a net operating loss for the calendar year 1955. Y Corporation's net operating loss for 1955 may not be carried back in computing the taxable income of X Corporation but shall be carried back in computing the taxable income of Y Corporation.
Example 2. On December 31, 1954, X Corporation and Y Corporation transferred all their assets to Z Corporation in a statutory consolidation to which section 361 applies. Z Corporation sustained a net operating loss for the calendar year 1955. Z Corporation's net operating loss for 1955 may not be carried back in computing the taxable income of X Corporation or Y Corporation.
Example 3. On December 31, 1954, X Corporation ceased all operations (other than liquidating activities) and transferred substantially all its properties to Y Corporation in a reorganization qualifying under section 368(a)(1)(C). Such properties comprised all of X Corporation's properties which were to be transferred pursuant to the reorganization. In the process of liquidating its assets and winding up its affairs, X Corporation sustained a net operating loss for its taxable year beginning on January 1, 1955. This net operating loss of X Corporation shall be carried back in computing the taxable income of that corporation but may not be carried back or over in computing the taxable income of Y Corporation.
(c) First taxable year to which carryovers apply. (1) The net operating loss carryovers available to the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall first be carried to the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after that date. This rule applies irrespective of whether the date of distribution or transfer is on the last day, or any other day, of the acquiring corporation's taxable year. Thus, such net operating loss carryovers shall first be used by the acquiring corporation with respect to the computation of its net operating loss deduction under section 172(a), and its taxable income determined under the provisions of section 172(b)(2), for such first taxable year. However, see paragraph (f) of this section.
(1) The net operating loss carryovers available to the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall first be carried to the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after that date. This rule applies irrespective of whether the date of distribution or transfer is on the last day, or any other day, of the acquiring corporation's taxable year. Thus, such net operating loss carryovers shall first be used by the acquiring corporation with respect to the computation of its net operating loss deduction under section 172(a), and its taxable income determined under the provisions of section 172(b)(2), for such first taxable year. However, see paragraph (f) of this section.
(2) The net operating loss carryovers available to the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall be carried to the acquiring corporation without diminution by reason of the fact that the acquiring corporation does not acquire 100 percent of the assets of the distributor or transferor corporation. Thus, if a parent corporation owning 80 percent of all classes of stock of its subsidiary corporation were to acquire its share of the assets of the subsidiary corporation upon a complete liquidation described in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of Sec. 1.381(a)-1, then, subject to the conditions and limitations of this section, 100 percent of the net operating loss carryovers available to the subsidiary corporation as of the close of the date of distribution would be carried over to the parent corporation.
(d) Limitation on net operating loss deduction for first taxable year ending after date of distribution or transfer. (1) That part of the acquiring corporation's net operating loss deduction, determined in accordance with sections 172(a) and 381(c)(1), for its first taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer which is attributable to the net operating loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation, is limited by section 381(c)(1)(B) and this paragraph to an amount equal to the acquiring corporation's postacquisition part year taxable income. Such postacquisition part year taxable income is the amount which bears the same ratio to the acquiring corporation's taxable income for the first taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer (determined under section 63 without regard to any net operating loss deduction but taking into account other items to which the acquiring corporation succeeds under section 381) as the number of days in such first taxable year which follow the date of distribution or transfer bears to the total number of days in such taxable year. Thus, if the date of distribution or transfer is the last day of the acquiring corporation's taxable year, the net operating loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor are allowed in full in computing under section 172(a) the net operating loss deduction of the acquiring corporation for its first taxable year ending after that date. In such instance, the number of days in the first taxable year which follow the date of distribution or transfer is the total number of days in such taxable year.
(1) That part of the acquiring corporation's net operating loss deduction, determined in accordance with sections 172(a) and 381(c)(1), for its first taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer which is attributable to the net operating loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation, is limited by section 381(c)(1)(B) and this paragraph to an amount equal to the acquiring corporation's postacquisition part year taxable income. Such postacquisition part year taxable income is the amount which bears the same ratio to the acquiring corporation's taxable income for the first taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer (determined under section 63 without regard to any net operating loss deduction but taking into account other items to which the acquiring corporation succeeds under section 381) as the number of days in such first taxable year which follow the date of distribution or transfer bears to the total number of days in such taxable year. Thus, if the date of distribution or transfer is the last day of the acquiring corporation's taxable year, the net operating loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor are allowed in full in computing under section 172(a) the net operating loss deduction of the acquiring corporation for its first taxable year ending after that date. In such instance, the number of days in the first taxable year which follow the date of distribution or transfer is the total number of days in such taxable year.
(2) The limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) applies solely for the purpose of computing the net operating loss deduction of the acquiring corporation under section 172(a) for the acquiring corporation's first taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer. The limitation does not apply for purposes of determining the portion of any net operating loss (whether of the distributor, transferor, or acquiring corporation) which may be carried to any taxable year of the acquiring corporation following its first taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer since such determination is made pursuant to section 172(b) and section 381(c)(1)(C). See paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section.
(3) The limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) shall be applied to the aggregate of the allowable net operating loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation without reference to the taxable years in which the net operating losses were sustained by such corporation. If the acquiring corporation has acquired the assets of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on the same date of distribution or transfer, then the limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) shall be applied to the aggregate of the net operating loss carryovers from all of such distributor or transferor corporations.
(4) If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the net operating loss carryovers of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on two or more different dates of distribution or transfer within one taxable year of the acquiring corporation, the limitation to be applied under section 381(c)(1)(B) to the aggregate of such carryovers shall be governed by the rules prescribed in paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-2.
(5) Illustrations. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:
(i) X Corporation and Y Corporation were organized on January 1, 1956, and make their returns on the calendar year basis. On December 16, 1957, X Corporation transferred all its assets to Y Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The net operating losses and taxable income (computed without the net operating loss deduction) of the two corporations are as follows, the assumption being made that none of the modifications specified in section 172(b)(2)(A) apply to any taxable year: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y
Taxable year Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1956......................................... ($35,000) ($5,000)Ending 12-16-57.............................. (30,000) xxx1957......................................... xxx 36,500------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) The aggregate of the net operating loss carryovers of X Corporation carried under section 381(c)(1)(A) to Y Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1957, is $65,000; but pursuant to section 381(c)(1)(B), only $1,500 of such aggregate amount ($36,500x 15/365) may be used in computing the net operating loss deduction of Y Corporation for such taxable year under section 172(a). This limitation applies even though Y Corporation's own net operating loss carryover to such year is only $5,000, with the result that Y Corporation has taxable income under section 63 of $30,000 for its taxable year ending December 31, 1957, that is, $36,500 less the sum of $5,000 and $1,500.
(iii) For rules determining the portion of any given loss of X Corporation or Y Corporation which may be carried to a taxable year of Y Corporation following its taxable year ending December 31, 1957, see sections 172(b)(2) and 381(c)(1)(C) and paragraph (f) of this section.
(i) X Corporation was organized on January 1, 1954, and Y Corporation was organized on January 1, 1956. Each corporation makes its return on the basis of the calendar year. On December 31, 1956, X Corporation transferred all its assets to Y Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The net operating losses and the taxable income (computed without any net operating loss deduction) of the two corporations are as follows, the assumption being made that none of the modifications specified in section 172(b)(2)(A) apply to any taxable year: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y
Taxable year Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1954......................................... ($5,000) xxx1955......................................... (15,000) xxx1956......................................... (10,000) $20,0001957......................................... xxx 40,000------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) The aggregate of the net operating loss carryovers of X Corporation carried under section 381(c)(1)(A) to Y Corporation's taxable year 1957 is $30,000, and the full amount of such carryovers is allowed in such taxable year to Y Corporation as a deduction under section 172(a), since such amount does not exceed the limitation ($40,000x 365/365) for such taxable year under section 381(c)(1)(B).
(i) X Corporation, Y Corporation, and Z Corporation were organized on January 1, 1954, and each corporation makes its return on the basis of the calendar year. On September 30, 1956, X Corporation and Y Corporation transferred all their assets to Z Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The net operating losses and the taxable income (computed without any net operating loss deduction) of the three corporations are as follows, the assumption being made that none of the modifications specified in section 172(b)(2)(A) apply to any taxable year: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y Z
Taxable year Corporation Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1954........................... ($5,000) ($3,000) ($40,000)1955........................... (4,000) (2,000) 10,000Ending 9-30-56................. (1,000) (9,000) xxx1956........................... xxx xxx 73,200------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) The aggregate of the net operating loss carryovers of X Corporation and Y Corporation carried under section 381(c)(1)(A) to Z Corporation's taxable year 1956 is $24,000; but, pursuant to section 381(c)(1)(B), only $18,400 of such aggregate amount ($73,200x 92/366) may be used in computing the net operating loss deduction of Z Corporation for such taxable year under section 172(a). For this purpose, Z Corporation may not use the total of the aggregate carryovers ($10,000) from X Corporation plus the aggregate carryovers ($14,000) from Y Corporation, even though each such aggregate of carryovers is separately less than the limitation ($18,400) applicable under section 381(c)(1)(B) and this section.
(iii) For rules determining the portion of any given loss of X Corporation, Y Corporation, or Z Corporation which may be carried to a taxable year of Z Corporation following its taxable year ending December 31, 1956, see sections 172(b)(2) and 381(c)(1)(C) and paragraph (f) of this section.
(e) Computation of carryovers and carrybacks; general rule--(1) Sequence for applying losses and computation of taxable income. The portion of any net operating loss which is carried back or carried over to any taxable year is the excess, if any, of the amount of the loss over the sum of the taxable income for each of the prior taxable years to which the loss may be carried under sections 172(b)(1) and 381. In determining the taxable income for each such prior taxable year for this purpose, the various net operating loss carryovers and carrybacks to such prior taxable year are considered to be applied in reduction of the taxable income in the order of the taxable years in which the net operating losses are sustained, beginning with the loss for the earliest taxable year. The application of this rule to the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for any taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer involves the use of carryovers of the distributor or transfer corporation, and of carryovers and carrybacks of the acquiring corporation. In such instance, the sequence for the use of loss years remains the same, and the requirement is to begin with the net operating loss of the earliest taxable year, whether or not it is a loss of the distributor, transferor, or acquiring corporation. The taxable income of the acquiring corporation for any taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer shall be determined in the manner prescribed by section 172(b)(2), except that, if the date of distribution or transfer is on a day other than the last day of a taxable year of the acquiring corporation, the taxable income of such corporation for the taxable year which includes such date shall be computed in the special manner prescribed by section 381(c)(1)(C) and paragraph (f) of this section.
(1) Sequence for applying losses and computation of taxable income. The portion of any net operating loss which is carried back or carried over to any taxable year is the excess, if any, of the amount of the loss over the sum of the taxable income for each of the prior taxable years to which the loss may be carried under sections 172(b)(1) and 381. In determining the taxable income for each such prior taxable year for this purpose, the various net operating loss carryovers and carrybacks to such prior taxable year are considered to be applied in reduction of the taxable income in the order of the taxable years in which the net operating losses are sustained, beginning with the loss for the earliest taxable year. The application of this rule to the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for any taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer involves the use of carryovers of the distributor or transfer corporation, and of carryovers and carrybacks of the acquiring corporation. In such instance, the sequence for the use of loss years remains the same, and the requirement is to begin with the net operating loss of the earliest taxable year, whether or not it is a loss of the distributor, transferor, or acquiring corporation. The taxable income of the acquiring corporation for any taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer shall be determined in the manner prescribed by section 172(b)(2), except that, if the date of distribution or transfer is on a day other than the last day of a taxable year of the acquiring corporation, the taxable income of such corporation for the taxable year which includes such date shall be computed in the special manner prescribed by section 381(c)(1)(C) and paragraph (f) of this section.
(2) Loss year of transferor or distributor considered prior taxable year. Section 381(c)(1)(C) provides that, for the purpose of determining the net operating loss carryovers under section 172(b)(2), a net operating loss for a loss year of a distributor or transferor corporation which ends on or before the last day of a loss year of the acquiring corporation shall be considered to be a net operating loss for a year prior to such loss year of the acquiring corporation. In a case where the acquiring corporation has acquired the assets of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on the same date of distribution or transfer, the loss years of the distributor or transferor corporations shall be taken into account in the order in which such loss years terminate; if any one of the loss years of a distributor or transferor corporation ends on the same day as the loss year of another distributor or transferor corporation, either loss year may be taken into account before the other.
(3) Years to which losses may be carried. The taxable years to which a net operating loss shall be carried back or carried over are prescribed by section 172(b)(1). Since the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ends with the close of the date of distribution or transfer, such taxable year and the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation which ends after that date shall be considered two separate taxable years to which a net operating loss of the distributor or transferor corporation for any taxable year ending before that date may be carried over. This rule applies even though the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation which ends on the date of distribution or transfer is a period of less than twelve months. However, for the purpose of determining under section 172(b)(1) the taxable years to which a net operating loss of the acquiring corporation is carried over or carried back, the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation which ends after the date of distribution or transfer shall be treated as only one taxable year even though such taxable year is considered under section 381(c)(1)(C) and paragraph (f)(2) of this section as two taxable years. The application of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. X Corporation was organized on January 1, 1954, and thereafter it sustained net operating losses in its calendar years 1954, 1955, and 1956. On June 30, 1957, X Corporation transferred all its assets to Y Corporation, which was organized on January 1, 1955, in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. In its taxable year ending June 30, 1957, X Corporation sustained a net operating loss. Y Corporation sustained net operating losses in its calendar years 1955, 1956, and 1958, but had taxable income for the year 1957. The years to which these losses of X Corporation and Y Corporation shall be carried, and the sequence in which carried, are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Loss year------------------------------------------------------------------------X 1954.................................. X 1955, X 1956, X 6/30/57, Y
1957, Y 1958.X 1955.................................. X 1954, X 1956, X 6/30/57, Y
1957, Y 1958, Y 1959.Y 1955.................................. Y 1956, Y 1957, Y 1958, Y
1959, Y 1960.X 1956.................................. X 1954, X 1955, X 6/30/57, Y
1957, Y 1958, Y 1959, Y 1960.Y 1956.................................. Y 1955, Y 1957, Y 1958, Y
1959, Y 1960, Y 1961.X 6-30-57............................... X 1955, X 1956, Y 1957, Y
1958, Y 1959, Y 1960, Y 1961.Y 1958.................................. Y 1955, Y 1956, Y 1957, Y
1959, Y 1960, Y 1961, Y 1962,
Y 1963.------------------------------------------------------------------------
(4) Computation of carryovers in a case where the date of distribution or transfer occurs on last day of acquiring corporation's taxable year. The computation of the net operating loss carryovers from the distributor or transferor corporation and from the acquiring corporation in a case where the date of distribution or transfer occurs on the last day of a taxable year of the acquiring corporation may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. X Corporation and Y Corporation were organized on January 1, 1955, and each corporation makes its return on the basis of the calendar year. On December 31, 1956, X Corporation transferred all its assets to Y Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The net operating losses and the taxable income (computed without any net operating loss deduction) of the two corporations are as follows, the assumption being made that none of the modifications specified in section 172(b)(2)(A) apply to any taxable year: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y
Taxable year Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1955......................................... ($2,000) ($11,000)1956......................................... (3,000) 10,0001957......................................... xxx (15,000)------------------------------------------------------------------------ The sequence in which the losses of X Corporation and Y Corporation are applied, and the computation of the carryovers to Y Corporation's calendar year 1958, may be illustrated as follows:
(i) X Corporation's 1955 loss. The carryover to 1958 is $2,000, computed as follows: Net operating loss.......................................... $2,000Less:
X's 1956 taxable income........................ 0
Y's 1957 taxable income........................ 0
------------
......... 0
-----------
Carryover.................................................. 2,000
(ii) Y Corporation's 1955 loss. The carryover to 1958 is $1,000, computed as follows: Net operating loss.......................................... $11,000Less:
Y's 1956 taxable income....................... $10,000
Y's 1957 taxable income....................... 0
-------------
.......... 10,000
-----------
Carryover.................................................. 1,000
(iii) X Corporation's 1956 loss. The carryover to 1958 is $3,000, computed as follows: Net operating loss........................................... $3,000Less:
X's 1955 taxable income......................... 0
Y's 1957 taxable income......................... 0
------------
......... 0
----------
Carryover................................................... 3,000
(iv) Y Corporation's 1957 loss. The carryover to 1958 is $15,000, computed as follows: Net operating loss.......................................... $15,000Less:
Y's 1955 taxable income.......................... 0
Y's 1956 taxable income before net $10,000
operating loss deduction............
Minus Y's 1956 net operating loss 11,000 0
deduction (i.e., Y's 1955 carryover)
-------------
.......... 0
----------
Carryover.................................................. 15,000
(v) Summary of carryovers to 1958. The aggregate of the net operating loss carryovers to 1958 is $21,000, computed as follows: X's 1955 loss................................................ $2,000Y's 1955 loss................................................ 1,000X's 1956 loss................................................ 3,000Y's 1957 loss................................................ 15,000
----------
Total....................................................... 21,000
(f) Computation of carryovers and carrybacks when date of distribution or transfer is not on last day of acquiring corporation's taxable year--(1) General rule. Pursuant to the provisions of section 381(c)(1)(C), the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for its taxable year which is a prior taxable year for purposes of section 172(b)(2) and paragraph (e) of this section shall be determined in the manner prescribed in this paragraph, if the date of distribution or transfer occurs within, but not on the last day of, such taxable year.
(1) General rule. Pursuant to the provisions of section 381(c)(1)(C), the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for its taxable year which is a prior taxable year for purposes of section 172(b)(2) and paragraph (e) of this section shall be determined in the manner prescribed in this paragraph, if the date of distribution or transfer occurs within, but not on the last day of, such taxable year.
(2) Taxable year considered as two taxable years. Such taxable year of the acquiring corporation shall be considered as though it were two taxable years, but only for the limited purpose of applying section 172(b)(2). The first of such two taxable years shall be referred to in this section as the preacquisition part year; the second, as the postacquisition part year. For purposes of section 172(b)(2), a net operating loss of the acquiring corporation shall be carried to the preacquisition part year and then to the postacquisition part year, whereas a net operating loss of a distributor or transferor corporation shall be carried to the postacquisition part year and then to the acquiring corporation's subsequent taxable years. In determining under section 172(b)(2) and this paragraph the portion of any net operating loss of a distributor or transferor corporation which is carried to any taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after the postacquisition part year, the taxable income (as determined under this paragraph) of the postacquisition part year shall be taken into account but the taxable income of the preacquisition part year (as so determined) shall not be taken into account. Though considered as two separate taxable years for purposes of section 172(b)(2), the preacquisition part year and the postacquisition part year are treated as one taxable year in determining the years to which a net operating loss is carried under section 172(b)(1). See paragraph (e)(3) of this section.
(3) Preacquisition part year. The preacquisition part year shall begin with the beginning of such taxable year of the acquiring corporation and shall end with the close of the date of distribution or transfer.
(4) Postacquisition part year. The postacquisition part year shall begin with the day following the date of distribution or transfer and shall end with the close of such taxable year of the acquiring corporation.
(5) Division of taxable income. The taxable income for such taxable year (computed with the modifications specified in section 172(b)(2)(A) but without any net operating loss deduction) of the acquiring corporation shall be divided between the preacquisition part year and the postacquisition part year in proportion to the number of days in each. Thus, if in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies Y Corporation acquires the assets of X Corporation on June 30, 1960, and Y Corporation has taxable income (computed in the manner so prescribed) of $36,600 for its calendar year 1960, then the preacquisition part year taxable income would be $18,200 ($36,600x 182/366) and the postacquisition part year taxable income would be $18,400 ($36,600x 184/366).
(6) Net operating loss deduction. After obtaining the taxable income of the preacquisition part year and of the postacquisition part year in the manner described in subparagraph (5) of this paragraph, it is necessary to compute the net operating loss deduction for each such part year. This deduction shall be determined in the manner prescribed by section 172(b)(2)(B) but subject to the provisions of this subparagraph. The net operating loss deduction for the preacquisition part year shall, for purposes of section 172(b)(2) only, be determined in the same manner as that prescribed by section 172(b)(2)(B) but shall be computed without taking into account any net operating loss of the distributor or transferor corporation. Therefore, only net operating loss carryovers and carrybacks of the acquiring corporation to the preacquisition part year shall be taken into account in computing the net operating loss deduction for such part year. The net operating loss deduction for the post- acquisition part year shall, for purposes of section 172(b)(2) only, be determined in the same manner as that prescribed by section 172(b)(2)(B) and shall be computed by taking into account all the net operating loss carryovers available to the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, as well as the net operating loss carryovers and carrybacks of the acquiring corporation to the postacquisition part year. The sequence in which the net operating losses of the two corporations shall be applied for purposes of this subparagraph shall be determined in the manner prescribed in paragraph (e) of this section.
(7) Limitation on taxable income. In no case shall the taxable income of the preacquisition part year or the postacquisition part year, as computed under this paragraph, be considered to be less than zero.
(8) Cross reference. If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the net operating loss carryovers of two or more distributors or transferor corporations on two or more dates of distribution or transfer during the same taxable year of the acquiring corporation, the determination of the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for such year pursuant to section 381(c)(1)(C) shall be governed by the rules prescribed in paragraph (c) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-2.
(9) Illustration. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:
(i) Facts. X Corporation was organized on January 1, 1955, and Y Corporation was organized on January 1, 1954. Each corporation makes its return on the basis of the calendar year. On June 30, 1956, X Corporation transferred all its assets to Y Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The net operating losses and the taxable income (computed without any net operating loss deduction) of the two corporations are as follows, the assumption being made that none of the modifications specified in section 172(b)(2)(A) apply to any taxable year: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y
Taxable year Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1954......................................... xxx ($5,000)1955......................................... ($65,000) (20,000)Ending June 30, 1956......................... 1,000 xxx1956......................................... xxx 36,600------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Y Corporation's 1954 loss. The carryover to 1957 is $0, computed as follows: Net operating loss........................................... $5,000
Less:
Y's 1955 taxable income.................................... 0
-------------
Carryover to Y's preacquisition part year................ 5,000Less:
Y's preacquisition part year taxable income $18,200
computed under subparagraph (5) of this
paragraph ($36,600x 182/366)..................
Minus Y's net operating loss deduction for xxx 18,200
preacquisition part year......................
----------------------
Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year and also to Y 0
1957....................................................
(iii) X Corporation's 1955 loss. The carryover to 1957 is $45,600, computed as follows: Net operating loss.......................................... $65,000Less:
X's 6/30/56 year taxable income........................... 1,000
-------------
Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year.............. 64,000Less:
Y's postacquisition part year taxable income $18,400
computed under subparagraph (5) of this
paragraph ($36,600x184/366)..................
Minus Y's net operating loss deduction for .......... $18,400
postacquisition part year (i.e., Y's 1954
carryover of $0 to such part year)...........
-----------
Carryover to Y 1957..................................... 45,600
(iv) Y Corporation's 1955 loss. The carryover to 1957 is $6,800, computed as follows: Net operating loss.......................................... $20,000Less:
Y's 1954 taxable income................................... 0
-------------
Carryover to Y's preacquisition part year............... 20,000Less:
Y's preacquisition part year taxable income $18,200
computed under subparagraph (5) of this
paragraph....................................
Minus Y's net operating loss deduction for 5,000
preacquisition part year (i.e., Y's 1954
carryover to such part year).................
------------
.......... 13,200
-----------
Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year.............. 6,800Less:
Y's postacquisition part year taxable income $18,400
computed under subparagraph (5) of this
paragraph....................................
Minus Y's net operating loss deduction for 64,000
postacquisition part year (i.e., Y's 1954
carryover of $0, and X's 1955 carryover of
$64,000, to such part year)..................
------------
.......... 0
-----------
Carryover to Y 1957..................................... 6,800
(v) Summary of carryovers to 1957. The aggregate of the net operating loss carryovers to 1957 is $52,400, determined as follows: Y's 1954 loss............................................... 0X's 1955 loss............................................... $45,600Y's 1955 loss............................................... 6,800
-----------
Total...................................................... 52,400
(g) Successive acquiring corporations. An acquiring corporation which, in a distribution or transfer to which section 381(a) applies, acquires the assets of a distributor or transferor corporation which previously acquired the assets of another corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, shall succeed to and take into account, subject to the conditions and limitations of sections 172 and 381, the net operating loss carryovers available to the first acquiring corporation under sections 172 and 381.
(h) Illustration. The application of this section may be further illustrated by the following example:
(1) Facts. X Corporation was organized on January 1, 1954, and Y Corporation was organized on January 1, 1955. Each corporation makes its return on the basis of the calendar year. On August 31, 1957, X Corporation transferred all its assets to Y Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The net operating losses and the taxable income of the two corporations for the taxable years involved are set forth in the tabulation below. The taxable income so shown is computed without the modifications required by section 172(b)(2)(A) and without the benefit of any net operating loss deduction. In its calendar year 1957, Y Corporation had a deduction of $365 which is disallowed by section 172(b)(2)(A). ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y
Taxable year Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1954......................................... ($7,000) xxx1955......................................... (10,000) ($10,000)1956......................................... (25,000) (15,000)Ending 8-31-57............................... 1,000 xxx1957......................................... xxx 54,7501958......................................... xxx (5,000)1959......................................... xxx 50,000------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Computation of carryovers and carrybacks. The sequence in which the losses of X Corporation and Y Corporation are applied and the computation of the carryovers to Y Corporation's calendar year 1959 may be illustrated as follows:
(i) X Corporation's 1954 loss. The carryover to 1958, which is the last year to which this loss may be carried, is $0, computed as follows: Net operating loss.......................................... $7,000Less:
X's 1955 taxable income....................... 0
X's 1956 taxable income....................... 0
------------
.......... 0
-----------
Carryover to X's 8/31/57-year........................... 7,000Less:
X's 8/31/57-year taxable income........................... 1,000
-------------
Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year.............. 6,000Less:
Y's postacquisition part year taxable income $18,422
computed under paragraph (f)(5) of this
section (($54,750+$365) x 122/365)...........
Minus Y's net operating loss deduction for xxx
postacquisition part year....................
------------
.......... 18,422
-----------
Carryover to Y 1958..................................... 0
(ii) X Corporation's 1955 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $0, computed as follows: Net operating loss.......................................... $10,000Less:
X's 1954 taxable income....................... 0
X's 1956 taxable income....................... 0
------------
.......... 0
-----------
Carryover to X's 8/31/57-year........................... 10,000Less:
X's 8/31/57-year taxable income before net $1,000
operating loss deduction.....................
Minus X's net operating loss deduction for 8/ 7,000
31/57-year (i.e., X's 1954 carryover)........
------------
.......... 0
-----------
Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year.............. 10,000Less:
Y's postacquisition part year taxable income $18,422
computed under paragraph (f)(5) of this
section......................................
Minus Y's net operating loss deduction for 6,000
postacquisition part year (i.e., X's 1954
carryover to such part year).................
------------
.......... 12,422
-----------
Carryover to Y 1958 and Y 1959.......................... 0
(iii) Y Corporation's 1955 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $0, computed as follows: Net operating loss.......................................... $10,000Less:
Y's 1956 taxable income................................... 0
-------------
Carryover to Y's preacquisition part year............... 10,000Less:
Y's preacquisition part year taxable income $36,693
computed under paragraph (f)(5) of this
section (($54,750+$365) x 243/365)...........
Minus Y's net operating loss deduction for xxx
preacquisition part year.....................
------------
.......... 36,693
-----------
Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year, to Y 1958, 0
and to Y 1959..........................................
(iv) X Corporation's 1956 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $22,578, computed as follows: Net operating loss......................................... $25,000Less:
X's 1954 taxable income....................... 0
X's 1955 taxable income....................... 0
X's 8/31/57-year taxable income $1,000
before net operating loss
deduction........................
Minus X's net operating loss $17,000 0 0
deduction for 8/31/57-year (i.e.,
X's 1954 carryover of $7,000 and
X's 1955 carryover of $10,000)...
-----------------------------------
Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year............. $25,000Less:
Y's postacquisition part year taxable income $18,422
computed under paragraph (f)(5) of this
section......................................
Minus Y's net operating loss deduction for 16,000
postacquisition part year (i.e., X's 1954
carryover of $6,000, X's 1955 carryover of
$10,000 and Y's 1955 carryover of $0, to such
part year)...................................
------------
......... 2,422
------------
Carryover to Y 1958.................................... 22,578Less:
Y's 1958 taxable income.................................. 0
-------------
Carryover to Y 1959.................................... 22,578
(v) Y Corporation's 1956 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $0, computed as follows: Net operating loss.......................................... $15,000Less:
Y's 1955 taxable income................................... 0
-------------
Carryover to Y's preacquisition part year............... 15,000Less:
Y's preacquisition part year taxable income $36,693
computed under paragraph (f)(5) of this
section......................................
Minus Y's net operating loss deduction for 10,000
preacquisition part year (i.e., Y's 1955
carryover to such part year).................
------------
.......... 26,693
-----------
Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year, to Y 1958, 0
and to Y 1959..........................................
(vi) Y Corporation's 1958 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $0, computed as follows: Net operating loss........................................... $5,000Less:
Y's 1955 taxable income \1\.................... 0
Y's 1956 taxable income........................ 0
------------
.......... 0
----------
Carryback to Y's preacquisition part year................ $5,000Less:
Y's preacquisition part year taxable income $36,693
computed under paragraph (f)(5) of this
section.......................................
Minus Y's net operating loss deduction for 25,000
preacquisition part year (i.e., Y's 1955
carryover of $10,000, and Y's 1956 carryover
of $15,000, to such part year)................
-------------
.......... 11,693
Carryback to Y's postacquisition part year and carryover 0
to Y 1959...............................................
\1\ Three-year carryback in case of loss years ending after December 31,
1957.
(vii) Summary of carryovers to 1959. The aggregate of the net operating loss carryovers to 1959 is $22,578, computed as follows: X's 1955 loss............................................... 0Y's 1955 loss............................................... 0X's 1956 loss............................................... $22,578Y's 1956 loss............................................... 0Y's 1958 loss............................................... 0
-----------
Total...................................................... 22,578
(3) Net operating loss deduction for 1957. (i) The net operating loss deduction available to Y Corporation under section 172(a) for the calendar year 1957, determined in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section, is $48,300, computed as follows: Aggregate of the net operating loss carryovers
available to the transferor corporation as of
the close of August 31, 1957, but limited by
paragraph (d) of this section to $18,300 (Y's
1957 taxable income of $54,750, computed
without any net operating loss deduction,
multiplied by 122/365)
Carryover of X's 1954 loss.................... $6,000
Carryover of X's 1955 loss.................... 10,000
Carryover of X's 1956 loss.................... 25,000
-------------
$41,000Aggregate of carryovers, limited as above................... $18,300Carryover of Y's 1955 loss.................................. 10,000Carryover of Y's 1956 loss.................................. 15,000Carryback of Y's 1958 loss.................................. 5,000
-------------
Net operating loss deduction............................... 48,800
(ii) The taxable income under section 63 for 1957 is $6,450, computed as follows: Taxable income determined without any net operating loss $54,750
deduction..................................................Less:
Net operating loss deduction for 1957, as determined under $48,300
subdivision (i) of this subparagraph.....................
-----------
Taxable income under section 63............................ 6,450
(4) Net operating loss deduction for 1959. The taxable income under section 63 for 1959 is $27,422, computed as follows: Taxable income determined without any net operating loss $50,000
deduction..................................................Less:
Net operating loss deduction for 1959 (i.e., the aggregate 22,578
carryovers determined under subparagraph (2)(vii) of this
paragraph)...............................................
-----------
Taxable income under section 63............................ 27,422
(5) Years to which losses may be carried. The taxable years to which the losses of X Corporation and Y Corporation may be carried, and the sequence in which carried, are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Loss year Carried to------------------------------------------------------------------------X 1954............................ X 1955, X 1956, X 8/31/57, Y 1957, Y
1958.X 1955............................ X 1954, X 1956, X 8/31/57, Y 1957, Y
1958, Y 1959.Y 1955............................ Y 1956, Y 1957, Y 1958, Y 1959, Y
1960.X 1956............................ X 1954, X 1955, X 8/31/57, Y 1957, Y
1958, Y 1959, Y 1960.Y 1956............................ Y 1955, Y 1957, Y 1958, Y 1959, Y
1960, Y 1961.Y 1958............................ Y 1955, Y 1956, Y 1957, Y 1959, Y
1960, Y 1961, Y 1962, Y 1963.------------------------------------------------------------------------ [T.D. 6500, 25 FR 11607, Nov. 26, 1960, as amended by T.D. 7564, 43 FR 40493, Sept. 12, 1978] Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-2 Net operating loss carryovers; two or more dates of distribution or transfer in the taxable year.
(a) In general. If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the net operating loss carryovers of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on two or more dates of distribution or transfer within one taxable year of the acquiring corporation, the limitation to be applied under section 381(c)(1)(B) to the aggregate of the net operating loss carryovers to that taxable year from all of the distributor or transferor corporations shall be determined by applying the rules prescribed in paragraph (b) of this section, and the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for that taxable year under sections 381(c)(1)(C) and 172(b)(2) shall be determined by applying the rules prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section. For purposes of this section, the term postacquisition income means postacquisition part year taxable income determined under paragraph (d)(1) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-1 by treating the first date of distribution or transfer as though it were the only date of distribution or transfer during the taxable year of the acquiring corporation.
(b) Determination of limitation under section 381(c)(1)(B)--(1) In general. If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the net operating loss carryovers of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on two or more dates of distribution or transfer during the same taxable year of the acquiring corporation, and if the amount of the net operating loss carryovers acquired on the first date of distribution or transfer equals or exceeds the postacquisition income, then the limitation under section 381(c)(1)(B) shall be an amount equal to such postacquisition income. If the amount of the net operating loss carryovers acquired on the first date of distribution or transfer is less than such postacquisition income, then the limitation under section 381(c)(1)(B) shall be determined as provided in subparagraphs (2) through (5) of this paragraph.
(1)(B)--(1) In general. If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the net operating loss carryovers of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on two or more dates of distribution or transfer during the same taxable year of the acquiring corporation, and if the amount of the net operating loss carryovers acquired on the first date of distribution or transfer equals or exceeds the postacquisition income, then the limitation under section 381(c)(1)(B) shall be an amount equal to such postacquisition income. If the amount of the net operating loss carryovers acquired on the first date of distribution or transfer is less than such postacquisition income, then the limitation under section 381(c)(1)(B) shall be determined as provided in subparagraphs (2) through (5) of this paragraph.
(2) Allocation of postacquisition income among partial postacquisition years. That part of the taxable year of the acquiring corporation beginning on the day following the first date of distribution or transfer and ending with the close of the taxable year of the acquiring corporation shall be divided into the same number of partial postacquisition years as the number of dates of distribution or transfer on which the acquiring corporation succeeds to net operating loss carryovers during its taxable year. The first partial postacquisition year shall begin with the day following the first date of distribution or transfer and shall end with the close of the second date of distribution or transfer. The second and succeeding partial postacquisition years shall begin with the day following the close of the preceding such partial year and shall end with the close of the succeeding date of distribution or transfer, or, if there is no such succeeding date, then with the close of the taxable year of the acquiring corporation. The postacquisition income of the acquiring corporation shall be allocated among the partial postacquisition years in proportion to the number of days in each such partial year.
(3) Two dates of distribution or transfer. If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the net operating loss carryovers of two distributor or transferor corporations on two dates of distribution or transfer during the same taxable year of the acquiring corporation, and if the amount of the net operating loss carryovers acquired on the first date equals or exceeds the income for the first partial postacquisition year, the limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) shall be the amount of the postacquisition income. If the income for the first partial postacquisition year exceeds the net operating loss carryovers acquired on the first date of distribution or transfer, the limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) shall be the amount of the postacquisition income reduced by the amount of such excess. The application of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:
(i) X Corporation has taxable income (computed without any net operating loss deduction) of $36,500 for its calendar year 1955. During 1955, X Corporation acquires the assets of Y and Z Corporations in statutory mergers to each of which section 361 applies, the dates of transfer being January 1 and December 1, respectively. The net operating loss carryovers of each transferor corporation and the income for each partial postacquisition year are: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Income for
Corp. Carryovers partial years Reduction----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Y............................................................... $1,000 $33,400 $32,400
($36,500 x 334/
365)Z............................................................... 50,000 3,000 0
($36,500 x 30/
365)
-----------------------------------------------
51,000 36,400 32,400----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) The limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) equals the postacquisition income of $36,400 reduced by $32,400, the excess of the income for the first partial year ($33,400) over the net operating loss carryovers acquired on the first date of transfer ($1,000). Accordingly, the limitation is $4,000 ($36,400 minus $32,400). Therefore, although X Corporation acquired carryovers aggregating $51,000 during 1955, it can utilize only $4,000 of such carryovers in computing its net operating loss deduction for 1955.
(4) Three dates of distribution or transfer. If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the net operating loss carryovers of three distributor or transferor corporations on three dates of distribution or transfer during the same taxable year of the acquiring corporation, and if the amount of the net operating loss carryovers acquired on the first date equals or exceeds the income for the first and second partial postacquisition years, the limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) shall be the amount of the postacquisition income. If the amount of the carryovers acquired on the first date equals or exceeds the income for the first partial postacquisition year but does not equal or exceed the income for the first and second partial postacquisition years, the limitation shall be the amount of the postacquisition income reduced by the excess of the income for the first and second partial postacquisition years over the amount of carryovers acquired on the first and second dates of distribution or transfer. If the income for the first partial postacquisition year exceeds the carryovers acquired on the first date, the limitation shall be the postacquisition income reduced by the sum of the amount of such excess plus the amount, if any, by which the income for the second partial postacquisition year exceeds the carryovers acquired on the second date. This subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:
(i) X Corporation has taxable income (computed without any net operating loss deduction) of $36,500 for its calendar year 1955. During 1955, X Corporation acquires the assets of M, N, and Z Corporations in statutory mergers to each of which section 361 applies, the dates of transfer being January 1, January 31, and December 1, respectively. The net operating loss carryovers of each transferor corporation and the income for each partial postacquisition year are: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Income for
Corp. Carryovers partial years Reduction----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------M............................................................... $4,000 $3,000 $23,400
($36,500 x 30/
365)N............................................................... 6,000 30,400
($36,500 x 304/
365)Z............................................................... 50,000 3,000 0
($36,500 x 30/
365)
-----------------------------------------------
60,000 36,400 23,400----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Since the carryovers of $4,000 acquired on the first date of transfer exceed the income for the first partial year ($3,000), the limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) is the amount of the postacquisition income ($36,400) reduced by the excess of the income for the first and second partial years ($33,400) over the carryovers acquired on the first and second dates of transfer ($10,000). Therefore, the limitation is $13,000 ($36,400 less $23,400).
(i) Assume the same facts as in Example (1) except that the amount of the net operating loss carryovers acquired from M Corporation is $1,000. The net operating loss carryovers of each transferor corporation and the income for each partial postacquisition year are: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Income for
Corp. Carryovers partial years Reduction----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------M............................................................... $1,000 $3,000 $2,000
($36,500 x 30/
365)N............................................................... 6,000 30,400 24,400
($36,500 x 304/
365)Z............................................................... 50,000 3,000 0
($36,500 x 30/
365)
-----------------------------------------------
57,000 36,400 26,400----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Since the income for the first partial year ($3,000) exceeds the $1,000 of carryovers acquired on the first date by $2,000, the limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) is the postacquisition income of $36,400 reduced by such excess and also reduced by the excess of the income for the second partial year ($30,400) over the carryovers acquired on the second date of transfer ($6,000). Therefore, the limitation is $10,000 ($36,400 less the sum of $2,000 and $24,400).
(i) Assume the same facts as in Example (2) except that the carryovers acquired from N Corporation are $75,000. The net operating loss carryovers of each transferor corporation and the income for each partial postacquisition year are: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Income for
Corp. Carryovers partial years Reduction----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------M............................................................... $1,000 $3,000 $2,000
($36,500 x 30/
365)N............................................................... 75,000 30,400 0
($36,500 x 304/
365)
Z............................................................... 50,000 3,000 0
($36,500 x 30/
365)
-----------------------------------------------
126,000 36,400 2,000----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Since the income for the first partial year ($3,000) exceeds the $1,000 of carryovers acquired on the first date by $2,000, the limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) is the postacquisition income of $36,400 reduced by $2,000, or $34,400. No further reduction is made since the income for the second partial year ($30,400) does not exceed the carryovers of $75,000 acquired on the second date of transfer.
(5) Four or more dates of distribution or transfer. If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the net operating loss carryovers of four or more distributor or transferor corporations on four or more dates of distribution or transfer during the same taxable year of the acquiring corporation, the limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) shall be determined consistently with the methods prescribed in subparagraphs (3) and (4) of this paragraph. The application of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:
(i) X Corporation has taxable income (computed without any net operating loss deduction) of $36,500 for its calendar year 1955. During 1955, X Corporation acquired the assets of M, N, O, Y, and Z Corporations in statutory mergers to each of which section 361 applied, the dates of transfer being, respectively, January 1, January 31, March 3, April 2, and December 1. The net operating loss carryovers of each transferor corporation and the income for each partial postacquisition year are: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Income for
Corp. Carryovers partial years Reduction----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------M............................................................... $1,000 $3,000 $2,000
($36,500 x 30/
365)N............................................................... 4,000 3,100
($36,500 x 31/
365)O............................................................... 1,000 3,000 1,100
($36,500 x 30/
365)Y............................................................... 10,000 24,300 14,300
($36,500 x 243/
365)Z............................................................... 20,000 3,000 0
($36,500 x 30/
365)
-----------------------------------------------
36,000 36,400 17,400----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) The limitation provided by section 381(c)(1)(B) equals the postacquisition income of $36,400 reduced by the sum of (a) the $2,000 excess of the income for the first partial year ($3,000) over the carryovers acquired from M Corporation ($1,000), (b) the $1,100 excess of the income for the second and third partial years ($6,100) over the carryovers acquired from N and O Corporations ($5,000), and (c) the $14,300 excess of the income for the fourth partial year ($24,300) over the carryovers acquired from Y Corporation ($10,000). Accordingly, the limitation is $19,000 ($36,400 minus $17,400). Therefore, although X Corporation acquired carryovers aggregating $36,000 during 1955, it can utilize only $19,000 of such carryovers in computing its net operating loss deduction for 1955.
(c) Determination of taxable income of acquiring corporation under section 381(c)(1)(C)--(1) In general. If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the net operating loss carryovers of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on two or more dates of distribution or transfer within one taxable year of the acquiring corporation, then pursuant to section 381(c)(1)(C) the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for its taxable year which is a prior taxable year for purposes of section 172(b)(2) and paragraph (e) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-1 shall be determined as provided in this paragraph.
(1)(C)--(1) In general. If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the net operating loss carryovers of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on two or more dates of distribution or transfer within one taxable year of the acquiring corporation, then pursuant to section 381(c)(1)(C) the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for its taxable year which is a prior taxable year for purposes of section 172(b)(2) and paragraph (e) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-1 shall be determined as provided in this paragraph.
(2) Division of taxable income. The taxable income of the acquiring corporation (computed with the modifications specified in section 172(b)(2)(A) but without any net operating loss deduction) shall be allocated proportionately on a daily basis among a preacquisition part year (determined under paragraph (f)(3) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-1 by treating the first date of distribution or transfer as though it were the only date of distribution or transfer during the taxable year of the acquiring corporation) and two or more partial postacquisition years (determined as provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this section). The preacquisition part year and each partial postacquisition year shall be considered a separate taxable year, but only for the limited purpose of applying sections 172(b)(2) and 381(c)(1)(C).
(3) Net operating loss deduction. The net operating loss deduction of the preacquisition part year and the partial postacquisition years shall be determined consistently with the manner described in paragraph (f)(6) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-1 but by taking into account, in the case of any partial postacquisition year, only the net operating loss carryovers and carrybacks of the acquiring corporation and those net operating loss carryovers from a distributor or transferor corporation which become available to the acquiring corporation as of the close of those dates of distribution or transfer which occur before the beginning of that specific partial postacquisition year. The sequence in which the net operating losses of the distributor or transferor and acquiring corporations shall be applied for this purpose shall be determined in the manner described in paragraph (e) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-1. Subject to the preceding sentence, the net operating loss carryovers to any specific partial postacquisition year, whether from a distributor, transferor, or acquiring corporation, shall be taken into account in the order of the taxable years in which the net operating losses arose, beginning with the loss for the earliest taxable year.
(4) Illustration. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:
(i) Facts. X Corporation, which was organized on January 1, 1957, sustained a net operating loss of $20,000 for its calendar year 1957 and had taxable income (computed without any net operating loss deduction) of $36,500 for its calendar year 1958. During 1958, X Corporation acquired the assets of Y and Z Corporations in statutory mergers to each of which section 361 applied, the dates of transfer being June 30 and September 30, respectively. None of the modifications specified in section 172(b)(2)(A) apply to any of the corporations for any taxable year. The taxable income (computed without any net operating loss deduction) and net operating losses of Y and Z Corporations (which were organized on January 1, 1957, and January 1, 1954, respectively) are set forth below: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acquiring Transferor Transferor
Taxable year corporation corporation corporation
X Y Z------------------------------------------------------------------------1954............................. xxx xxx ($30,000)1955............................. xxx xxx 1,0001956............................. xxx xxx 1,0001957............................. ($20,000) ($25,000) 1,000Ending 6-30-58................... xxx 1,000 xxxEnding 9-30-58................... xxx xxx 1,0001958............................. 36,500 xxx xxx------------------------------------------------------------------------ The sequence in which the losses of the acquiring corporation and the transferor corporations are applied and the computation of the carryovers to X Corporation's calendar year 1959 are illustrated in the following subdivisions of this example.
(ii) Computation of taxable income. X Corporation's taxable income, determined in the manner described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph, for the preacquisition part year and for the partial postacquisition years is as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Taxable
Year income Computation------------------------------------------------------------------------Preacquisition part year................ $18,100 $36,500 x 181/365Partial No. 1........................... 9,200 36,500 x 92/365Partial No. 2........................... 9,200 36,500 x 92/365------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iii) Z Corporation's 1954 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $0, computed as follows: Net operating loss......................................... $30,000Less:
Z's 1955, 1956, 1957, and 9/30/58-3 year income.......... 4,000
------------Net operating loss carryover to Partial No. 2 year......... 26,000Less:
Partial No. 2 year taxable income........................ 9,200
------------
16,800------------------------------------------------------------------------ The balance of $16,800 is not carried over to 1959 since X Corporation's taxable year 1958 is the last of the five years to which Z's 1954 loss may be carried under section 172(b)(1).
(iv) Y Corporation's 1957 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $14,800, computed as follows: Net operating loss........................................... $25,000Less:
Y's 6/30/58-year income.................................... 1,000
------------Net operating loss carryover to Partial No. 1 year........... 24,000Less:
Partial No. 1 year taxable income.......................... 9,200
------------
Carryover to Partial No. 2 year.......................... 14,800Less:
X's Partial No. 2 year taxable income........... $9,200
Minus X's net operating loss deduction for 26,000
Partial No. 2 year (i.e., Z's 1954 carryover of
$26,000 to such partial year)..................
-----------
......... 0
----------
Carryover to 1959........................................ 14,800
(v) X Corporation's 1957 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $1,900, computed as follows: Net operating loss........................................... $20,000Less:
X's preacquisition part year taxable income................ 18,100
------------
Carryover to Partial No. 1 year.......................... 1,900Less:
Partial No. 1 year taxable income............... $9,200
Minus X's net operating loss deduction for 24,000
Partial No. 1 year (i.e., Y's 1957 carryover of
$24,000 to such partial year)..................
-----------
......... 0
----------
Carryover to Partial No. 2 year.......................... 1,900Less:
Partial No. 2 year taxable income............... $9,200
Minus X's net operating loss deduction for 40,800
Partial No. 2 year (i.e., Z's 1954 carryover of
$26,000, and Y's 1957 carryover of $14,800, to
such partial year..............................
-----------
......... 0
----------
Carryover to 1959........................................ $1,900
(vi) Summary of carryovers to 1959. The aggregate of the net operating loss carryovers to 1959 is $16,700, computed as follows: Z's 1954 loss............................................... xxxY's 1957 loss............................................... $14,800X's 1957 loss............................................... 91,900
-----------
Total...................................................... 16,700
Sec. 1.381(c)(2)-1 Earnings and profits.
(a) In general. (1) Section 381(c)(2) requires the acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies to succeed to, and take into account, the earnings and profits, or deficit in earnings and profits, of the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer. In determining the amount of such earnings and profits, or deficit, to be carried over, and the manner in which they are to be used by the acquiring corporation after such date, the provisions of section 381(c)(2) and this section shall apply. For purposes of section 381(c)(2) and this section, if the distributor or transferor corporation accumulates earnings and profits, or incurs a deficit in earnings and profits, after the date of distribution or transfer and before the completion of the reorganization or liquidation, such earnings and profits, or deficit, shall be deemed to have been accumulated or incurred as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer.
(1) Section 381(c)(2) requires the acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies to succeed to, and take into account, the earnings and profits, or deficit in earnings and profits, of the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer. In determining the amount of such earnings and profits, or deficit, to be carried over, and the manner in which they are to be used by the acquiring corporation after such date, the provisions of section 381(c)(2) and this section shall apply. For purposes of section 381(c)(2) and this section, if the distributor or transferor corporation accumulates earnings and profits, or incurs a deficit in earnings and profits, after the date of distribution or transfer and before the completion of the reorganization or liquidation, such earnings and profits, or deficit, shall be deemed to have been accumulated or incurred as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer.
(2) If the distributor or transferor corporation has accumulated earnings and profits as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, such earnings and profits shall (except as hereinafter provided in this section) be deemed to be received by, and to become a part of the accumulated earnings and profits of, the acquiring corporation as of such time. Similarly, if the distributor or transferor corporation has a deficit in accumulated earnings and profits as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, such deficit shall (except as hereinafter provided in this section) be deemed to be incurred by the acquiring corporation as of such time. In no event, however, shall the accumulated earnings and profits, or deficit, of the distribution or transferor corporation be taken into account in determining earnings and profits of the acquiring corporation for the taxable year during which occurs the date of distribution or transfer.
(3) Any part of the accumulated earnings and profits, or deficit in accumulated earnings and profits, of the distributor or transferor corporation which consists of earnings and profits, or deficits, accumulated before March 1, 1913, shall be deemed to become earnings and profits, or deficits, of the acquiring corporation accumulated before March 1, 1913, and any part of the accumulated earnings and profits of the distributor or transferor corporation which consists of increase in value of property accrued before March 1, 1913, shall be deemed to become earnings and profits of the acquiring corporation consisting of increase in value of property accrued before March 1, 1913.
(4) If the acquiring corporation and each distributor or transferor corporation has accumulated earnings and profits as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, or if each of such corporations has a deficit in accumulated earnings and profits as of such time, then the accumulated earnings and profits (or deficit) of each such corporation shall be consolidated as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer in the accumulated earnings and profits account of the acquiring corporation. See subparagraph (6) of this paragraph for determination of the accumulated earnings and profits (or deficit) of the acquiring corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer.
(5) If (i) one or more corporations a party to a distribution or transfer has accumulated earnings and profits as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, and (ii) one or more of such corporations has a deficit in accumulated earnings and profits as of such time, the total of any such deficits shall be used only to offset earnings and profits accumulated, or deemed to have been accumulated under subparagraph (6) of this paragraph, by the acquiring corporation after the date of distribution or transfer. In such instance, the acquiring corporation will be considered as maintaining two separate earnings and profits accounts after the date of distribution or transfer. The first such account shall contain the total of the accumulated earnings and profits as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer of each corporation which has accumulated earnings and profits as of such time, and the second such account shall contain the total of the deficits in accumulated earnings and profits of each corporation which has a deficit as of such time. The total deficit in the second account may not be used to reduce the accumulated earnings and profits in the first account (although such earnings and profits may be offset by deficits incurred, or deemed to have been incurred, after the date of distribution or transfer) but shall be used only to offset earnings and profits accumulated, or deemed to have been accumulated under subparagraph (6) of this paragraph, by the acquiring corporation after the date of distribution or transfer.
(6) In any case in which it is necessary to compute the accumulated earnings and profits, or the deficit in accumulated earnings and profits, of the acquiring corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer and such date is a day other than the last day of a taxable year of the acquiring corporation--
(i) If the acquiring corporation has earnings and profits for its taxable year during which occurs the date of distribution or transfer, such earnings and profits (a) shall be deemed to have accumulated as of the close of such date in an amount which bears the same ratio to the undistributed earnings and profits of such corporation for such year as the number of days in the taxable year preceding the date following the date of distribution or transfer bears to the total number of days in the taxable year, and (b) shall be deemed to have accumulated after the date of distribution or transfer in an amount which bears the same ratio to the undistributed earnings and profits of such corporation for such year as the number of days in the taxable year following such date bears to the total number of days in such taxable year. For purposes of the preceding sentence, the undistributed earnings and profits of the acquiring corporation for such taxable year shall be the earnings and profits for such taxable year reduced by any distributions made therefrom during such taxable year.
(ii) If the acquiring corporation has an operating deficit for its taxable year during which occurs the date of distribution or transfer, then, unless the actual accumulated earnings and profits, or deficit, as of such date can be shown, such operating deficit shall be deemed to have accumulated in a manner similar to that described in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph.
(7) This paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples, in which it is assumed that none of the accumulated earnings and profits, or deficits, consist of earnings and profits or deficits accumulated, or increase in value of property accrued, before March 1, 1913.
(i) M and N Corporations make their returns on the basis of the calendar year. On June 30, 1959, M Corporation transfers all its assets to N Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The books of the two corporations reveal the following information: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
M N
Description Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------Accumulated earnings and profits at close of $100,000 $150,000
calendar year 1958..........................Earnings and profits of taxable year ending 15,000 ...........
June 30, 1959...............................Earnings and profits of calendar year 1959... ............ 36,500Distributions during calendar year 1959...... 0 0------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) As of the close of June 30, 1959, N acquires from M accumulated earnings and profits of $115,000. Since M and N each has accumulated earnings and profits as of the close of the date of transfer, M's accumulated earnings and profits are added to N's accumulated earnings and profits as of such time. However, no part of M's accumulated earnings and profits is taken into account in determining N's earnings and profits for the calendar year 1959. Therefore, N's earnings and profits for the calendar year 1959 are $36,500.
(i) X and Y Corporations make their returns on the basis of the calendar year. On June 30, 1959, X Corporation transfers all its assets to Y Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The books of the two corporations reveal the following information: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y
Description Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------Accumulated earnings and profits at close of $20,000 $100,000
calendar year 1958..........................Deficit in earnings and profits for taxable 80,000 ...........
year ending June 30, 1959...................Earnings and profits of calendar year 1959... ............ 36,500Distributions during calendar year 1959...... 0 0------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) As of the close of June 30, 1959, Y acquires from X a deficit in accumulated earnings and profits in the amount of $60,000. This deficit may be used only to reduce those earnings and profits of Y which are accumulated, or deemed to have accumulated, after June 30, 1959. Accordingly, as of December 31, 1959, the accumulated earnings and profits of Y amount to $118,100; at such time Y also has a separate deficit in accumulated earnings and profits in the amount of $41,600. These amounts are determined as follows: Accumulated earnings and profits of Y as of the close of $100,000
1958.......................................................Add:
Portion of undistributed earnings and profits of Y for 18,100
1959 deemed to have accumulated as of close of June 30,
1959 ($36,500x181/365)...................................
-----------
Accumulated earnings and profits of Y as of close of 118,100
June 30, 1959, and also as of Dec. 31, 1959............
===========
Portion of undistributed earnings and profits of Y for 18,400
1959 deemed to have accumulated after June 30, 1959
($36,500x184/365)........................................Less:
Deficit in accumulated earnings and profits acquired by Y 60,000
from X Corporation as of close of June 30, 1959..........
-----------
Separate deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of 41,600
Y as of Dec. 31, 1959..................................
Example 3. Assume the same facts as in Example (2), except that on September 15, 1959, Y Corporation makes a cash distribution of $96,500. The entire distribution is a dividend: $36,500 from earnings and profits for the taxable year 1959 and $60,000 from earnings and profits accumulated as of December 31, 1958. Accordingly, as of December 31, 1959, Y has accumulated earnings and profits of $40,000, and also has a separate deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of $60,000. These amounts are determined as follows: Earnings and profits of Y for calendar year 1959............. $36,500Accumulated earnings and profits of Y as of close of 1958.... 100,000
----------
Total....................................................... 136,500Less:
Distributions during 1959.................................. 96,500
----------
Accumulated earnings and profits of Y as of Dec. 31, 1959 40,000
==========Deficit in accumulated earnings and profits acquired from X $60,000
as of close of June 30, 1959................................Less:
Portion of Y's undistributed earnings and profits for 1959 0
deemed to have accumulated after June 30, 1959............
----------
Separate deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of Y 60,000
as of Dec. 31, 1959.....................................
(i) M and N Corporations make their returns on the basis of the calendar year. On June 30, 1959, M Corporation transfers all its assets to N Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The books of the two corporations reveal the following information: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
M N
Description Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------Accumulated earnings and profits at close of $100,000 $50,000
calendar year 1958..........................Earnings and profits for taxable year ending 10,000
June 30, 1959...............................Deficit in earnings and profits for calendar ............ 146,000
year 1959...................................Distributions during calendar year 1959...... 0 0------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Assuming that N has not shown its actual accumulated earnings and profits, or deficit, as of the close of June 30, 1959, N has a deficit in accumulated earnings and profits at such time which amounts to $22,400, determined as follows: Accumulated earnings and profits of N as of close of 1958.... $50,000Less:
Portion of deficit in earnings and profits of N for 1959 72,400
deemed to have accumulated as of close of June 30, 1959
($146,000x181/365)........................................
----------
Deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of N as of 22,400
close of June 30, 1959, and also as of Dec. 31, 1959....------------------------------------------------------------------------ As of the close of June 30, 1959, N acquires from M accumulated earnings and profits in the amount of $110,000, no part of which may be offset by N's own deficit of $22,400; however, such earnings and profits may be offset by deficits incurred, or deemed incurred, by N after June 30, 1959. Thus, as of December 31, 1959, N has the above-mentioned deficit of $22,400; at such time N also has accumulated earnings and profits in the amount of $36,400, determined as follows: Accumulated earnings and profits acquired from M as of close $110,000
of June 30, 1959...........................................Less:
Portion of deficit in earnings and profits of N for 1959 73,600
deemed to have accumulated after June 30, 1959
($146,000x184/365).......................................
-----------
Accumulated earnings and profits of N as of Dec. 31, 36,400
1959...................................................
Example 5. Assume the same facts as in Example (4), except that on September 9, 1959, N Corporation makes a cash distribution of $100,000. The amount of $82,000 is a dividend from accumulated earnings and profits, computed as follows: Accumulated earnings and profits acquired from M as of close $110,000
of June 30, 1959...........................................Less:
Deficit in earnings and profits of N for 1959 deemed to 28,000
have accumulated from June 30 through Sept. 8, 1959
($146,000x70/365)........................................
-----------
Accumulated earnings and profits as of close of Sept. 8, 82,000
1959...................................................
As of December 31, 1959, N Corporation has a deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of $68,000, computed as follows: Deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of N as of close $22,400
of June 30, 1959............................................Add:
Portion of N's deficit in earnings and profits for 1959 45,600
deemed to have accumulated after Sept. 8, 1959
($146,000x114/365)........................................
----------
Deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of N as of 68,000
Dec. 31, 1959...........................................
(i) X, Y, and Z Corporations make their returns on the basis of the calendar year. On June 30, 1959, X Corporation and Y Corporation transfer all their assets to Z Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The books of the three corporations reveal the following information: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y Z
Description Corporation Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (transferor) (acquirer)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Accumulated earnings and profits (or deficit) at close of calendar year $35,000 ($25,000) ($20,000)
1958..................................................................Earnings and profits (or deficit) for taxable year ended June 30, 1959. 5,000 (5,000)Earnings and profits for calendar year 1959............................ ............ ............ 36,500Distributions during 1959.............................................. 0 0 0----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) As of the close of June 30, 1959, Z acquires from Y a deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of $30,000. As of such time, Z's own deficit in accumulated earnings and profits amounts to $1,900, determined as follows: Deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of Z as of close $20,000
of 1958....................................................Less:
Portion of undistributed earnings and profits of Z for 18,100
1959 deemed to have accumulated as of close of June 30,
1959 ($36,500x181/365)...................................
-----------
Deficit in accumulated earnings and profits as of close 1,900
of June 30, 1959.......................................
The total deficit of $31,900 may be used only to offset earnings and profits of Z accumulated, or deemed to have accumulated, after June 30, 1959; such deficit may not be used to reduce the accumulated earnings and profits of $40,000 acquired from X as of the close of June 30, 1959. Thus, as of December 31, 1959, the accumulated earnings and profits of Z amount to $40,000; at such time Z Corporation also has a separate deficit in accumulated earnings and profits in the amount of $13,500, determined as follows: Deficit in accumulated earnings and profits as of close of $31,900
June 30, 1959..............................................Less:
Portion of undistributed earnings and profits of Z for 18,400
1959 deemed to have accumulated after June 30, 1959
($36,500x184/365)........................................
-----------
Separate deficit in accumulated earnings and profits as 13,500
of Dec. 31, 1959.......................................
Example 7. X and Y Corporations make their returns on the basis of the calendar year. On December 31, 1954, X transfers all its assets to Y in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The books of the two corporations reveal the following information: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y
Description Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------Accumulated earnings and profits (or deficit) ($50,000) $210,000
at close of calendar year 1954..............Earnings and profits (or deficit) for
calendar year:
1955....................................... ............ 5,000
1956....................................... ............ (20,000)
1957....................................... ............ 70,000
1958....................................... ............ 60,000
1959....................................... ............ 55,000Cash distributions on:
Sept. 1, 1957.............................. ............ 80,000
Sept. 1, 1958.............................. ............ 40,000
Sept. 1, 1959.............................. ............ 30,000------------------------------------------------------------------------ The balances in the accumulated earnings and profits account and the separate deficit account of Y Corporation at the close of the taxable year involved are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Accumulated
Deficit earnings
Year acquired and profits
from X of Y
Corporation Corporation------------------------------------------------------------------------1954.......................................... $50,000 $210,0001955.......................................... 45,000 210,0001956.......................................... 45,000 190,0001957.......................................... 45,000 180,0001958.......................................... 25,000 180,0001959.......................................... None 180,000------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) Successive acquisitions. (1) If, as of the date of distribution or transfer, either the acquiring corporation, or the distributor or transferor corporation, or both, is considered under paragraph (a) of this section to be maintaining separate earnings and profits accounts as the result of a prior transaction or transactions to which section 381(a) applied, the accumulated earnings and profits, or deficit in accumulated earnings and profits, of each such corporation shall be combined with the appropriate earnings and profits account of the other such corporation. For example, if, as of the date of transfer, the acquiring corporation and the transferor corporation are each maintaining separate accounts, one containing accumulated earnings and profits and the other containing a deficit in accumulated earnings and profits, the amounts in the two accumulated earnings and profits accounts shall be combined into one account, and the amounts in the two deficit accounts shall be combined into a second account, and the amount in one combined account may not be used to offset the amount in the other combined account.
(1) If, as of the date of distribution or transfer, either the acquiring corporation, or the distributor or transferor corporation, or both, is considered under paragraph (a) of this section to be maintaining separate earnings and profits accounts as the result of a prior transaction or transactions to which section 381(a) applied, the accumulated earnings and profits, or deficit in accumulated earnings and profits, of each such corporation shall be combined with the appropriate earnings and profits account of the other such corporation. For example, if, as of the date of transfer, the acquiring corporation and the transferor corporation are each maintaining separate accounts, one containing accumulated earnings and profits and the other containing a deficit in accumulated earnings and profits, the amounts in the two accumulated earnings and profits accounts shall be combined into one account, and the amounts in the two deficit accounts shall be combined into a second account, and the amount in one combined account may not be used to offset the amount in the other combined account.
(2) This paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples, in which it is assumed that none of the accumulated earnings and profits, or deficits, consist of earnings and profits or deficits accumulated, or increase in value of property accrued, before March 1, 1913.
(i) X, Y, and Z Corporations make their returns on the basis of the calendar year. On June 30, 1958, X Corporation transfers all its assets to Z Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies, and on August 31, 1958, Y Corporation transfers all its assets to Z Corporation in another statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The books of the three corporations reveal the following information: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y Z
Description Corporation Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (transferor) (acquirer)----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Accumulated earnings and profits (deficit) at close of calendar year ($40,000 $10,000 $60,000
1957..................................................................Deficit in earnings and profits for taxable year ending June 30, 1958.. (5,000) ............ ...........Earnings and profits for taxable year ending Aug. 31, 1958............. ............ 2,000 ...........Earnings and profits of calendar year 1958............................. ............ ............ 36,500Distributions during calendar year 1958................................ 0 0 0----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) As of the close of June 30, 1958, Z acquires from X a deficit in accumulated earnings and profits in the amount of $45,000, which deficit may be used only to reduce those earnings and profits of Z which are accumulated, or deemed to have been accumulated, after June 30, 1958. As of the close of August 31, 1958, Z acquires from Y earnings and profits of $12,000, no portion of which may be reduced by the deficit acquired by Z from X. Accordingly, as of December 31, 1958, Z has accumulated earnings and profits of $90,100, and also has a separate deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of $26,600. These amounts are determined as follows: Accumulated earnings and profits of Z as of Dec. 31, 1957... $60,000Add:
Portion of undistributed earnings and profits of Z for 18,100
1958 deemed to have accumulated as of close of June 30,
1958 ($36,500x181/365)...................................
-----------Accumulated earnings and profits of Z as of June 30, 1958... 78,100Add:
Accumulated earnings and profits acquired by Z from Y as 12,000
of close of Aug. 31, 1958................................
-----------Accumulated earnings and profits of Z as of close of Aug. 90,100
31, 1958, and also as of Dec. 31, 1958.....................
===========Deficit in accumulated earnings and profits acquired by Z 45,000
from X as of close of June 30, 1958........................
Less:
Portion of undistributed earnings and profits of Z for 6,200
1958 deemed to have accumulated from June 30 through Aug.
31, 1958 ($36,500x62/365)................................
-----------
Separate deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of 38,800
Z as of Aug. 31, 1958..................................Less:
Portion of undistributed earnings and profits of Z for 12,200
1958 deemed to have accumulated after Aug. 31, 1958
($36,500x122/365)........................................
-----------
Separate deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of 26,600
Z as of Dec. 31, 1958..................................
(i) Assume the same facts as in Example (1), plus the additional fact that on June 30, 1959, Z Corporation transfers all its assets to M Corporation (which makes its return on the basis of the calendar year) in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies, and that as of such time M Corporation is considered to be maintaining separate earnings and profits accounts as the result of a previous transaction to which section 381(a) applied. The books of the two corporations reveal the following information: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Z M
Description Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------Accumulated earnings and profits as of Dec. $90,100 $50,000
31, 1958....................................Separate deficit in accumulated earnings and 26,600 30,000
profits as of Dec. 31, 1958.................Earnings and profits for taxable year ending 5,000 ...........
June 30, 1959...............................Earnings and profits of calendar year 1959... ............ 36,500Distributions during 1959.................... 0 0------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) As of June 30, 1959, M acquires from Z accumulated earnings and profits of $90,100, which amount is combined with M's own accumulated earnings and profits of $50,000; M also acquires from Z a deficit in accumulated earnings and profits of $21,600 ($26,600 minus $5,000), which amount is combined with M's own deficit of $11,900. The total deficit of $33,500 may be used only to reduce earnings and profits of M which are accumulated, or deemed to have accumulated, after June 30, 1959. Accordingly, as of December 31, 1959, M has accumulated earnings and profits of $140,100, and also has a separate deficit in accumulated earnings and profits in the amount of $15,100. These amounts are determined as follows: Deficit of M as of Dec. 31, 1958............................ $30,000Less:
Portion of M's undistributed earnings and profits for 1959 18,100
deemed to have accumulated as of close of June 30, 1959
($36,500x181/365)........................................
-----------
Deficit of M as of June 30, 1959........................ 11,900Plus:
Deficit of Z as of June 30, 1959.......................... 21,600
-----------
Combined deficit of M as of close of June 30, 1959...... 33,500Less:
Portion of M's undistributed earnings and profits for 1959 18,400
deemed to have accumulated after June 30, 1959
($36,500x184/365)........................................
-----------
Separate deficit of M as of Dec. 31, 1959............... 15,100
===========Accumulated earnings and profits of M as of Dec. 31, 1958, 50,000
and also as of June 30, 1959...............................Accumulated earnings and profits of Z as of Dec. 31, 1958, 90,100
and also as of June 30, 1959...............................
-----------
Combined accumulated earnings and profits of M as of 140,100
close of June 30, 1959, and also as of Dec. 31, 1959...
(c) Distribution of earnings and profits pursuant to reorganization or liquidation. (1) If, in a reorganization to which section 381(a)(2) applies, the transferor corporation pursuant to the plan of reorganization distributes to its stockholders property consisting not only of property permitted by section 354 to be received without recognition of gain, but also of other property or money, then the accumulated earnings and profits of the transferor corporation as of the close of the date of transfer shall be computed by taking into account the amount of earnings and profits properly applicable to the distribution, regardless of whether such distribution occurs before or after the close of the date of transfer.
(1) If, in a reorganization to which section 381(a)(2) applies, the transferor corporation pursuant to the plan of reorganization distributes to its stockholders property consisting not only of property permitted by section 354 to be received without recognition of gain, but also of other property or money, then the accumulated earnings and profits of the transferor corporation as of the close of the date of transfer shall be computed by taking into account the amount of earnings and profits properly applicable to the distribution, regardless of whether such distribution occurs before or after the close of the date of transfer.
(2) If, in a distribution to which section 381(a)(1) (relating to certain liquidations of subsidiaries) applies, the acquiring corporation receives less than 100 percent of the assets distributed by the distributor corporation, then the accumulated earnings and profits of the distributor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution shall be computed by taking into account the amount of earnings and profits properly applicable to the distributions to minority stockholders, regardless of whether such distributions occur before or after the close of the date of distribution. [T.D. 6586, 26 FR 12550, Dec. 28, 1961, as amended by T.D. 6692, 28 FR 12817, Dec. 3, 1963; T.D. 9700, 79 FR 66617, Nov. 10, 2014] Sec. 1.381(c)(3)-1 Capital loss carryovers.
(a) Carryover requirement. (1) Section 381(c)(3) requires the acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies to succeed to, and take into account, the capital loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation. To determine the amount of these carryovers as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, and to integrate them with the capital loss carryovers of the acquiring corporation for purposes of determining the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for taxable years ending after the date of distribution or transfer, it is necessary to apply the provisions of section 1212 in accordance with the conditions and limitations of section 381(c)(3) and this section.
(1) Section 381(c)(3) requires the acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies to succeed to, and take into account, the capital loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation. To determine the amount of these carryovers as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, and to integrate them with the capital loss carryovers of the acquiring corporation for purposes of determining the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for taxable years ending after the date of distribution or transfer, it is necessary to apply the provisions of section 1212 in accordance with the conditions and limitations of section 381(c)(3) and this section.
(2) The capital loss carryovers of the acquiring corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall be determined without reference to any capital gains or capital losses of the distributor or transferor corporation. The capital loss carryovers of a distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall be determined without reference to any capital gains or capital losses of the acquiring corporation.
(3) This section contains rules applicable to capital loss carryovers determined without reference to the amendment of section 1212(a) made by section 7 of the Act of September 2, 1964 (Public Law 88-571, 78 Stat. 860) in respect of foreign expropriation capital losses. If the distributor, transferor, or acquiring corporation sustains a net capital loss in a taxable year ending after December 31, 1958, any portion of which is attributable to a foreign expropriation capital loss, such portion shall be carried over to each of the ten succeeding taxable years consistently with the rules prescribed in this section and paragraph (a)(2) of Sec. 1.1212-1.
(b) First taxable year to which carryovers apply. (1) The capital loss carryovers available to the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall first be carried to the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after that date. This rule applies irrespective of whether the date of distribution or transfer is on the last day, or any other day, of the acquiring corporation's taxable year.
(1) The capital loss carryovers available to the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall first be carried to the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after that date. This rule applies irrespective of whether the date of distribution or transfer is on the last day, or any other day, of the acquiring corporation's taxable year.
(2) The capital loss carryovers available to the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall be carried to the acquiring corporation without diminution by reason of the fact that the acquiring corporation does not acquire 100 percent of the assets of the distributor or transferor corporation.
(c) Limitation on capital loss carryovers for first taxable year ending after date of distribution or transfer. (1) Any capital loss carryover of a distributor or transferor corporation which is available to the acquiring corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall be a short-term capital loss of the acquiring corporation in each of the taxable years to which the net capital loss giving rise to such carryover may be carried to the extent provided in section 1212 and this section. However, in the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after the date of distribution or transfer, the total capital loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation which may be treated in that year as short-term capital losses of the acquiring corporation is limited by section 381(c)(3)(B) to an amount which bears the same ratio to the acquiring corporation's capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) for such first taxable year (determined without regard to any capital loss carryovers) as the number of days in such first taxable year which follow the date of distribution or transfer bears to the total number of days in such taxable year. Thus, if the date of distribution or transfer is the last day of the acquiring corporation's taxable year, there is no limitation under section 381(c)(3)(B) on the amount of such carryovers which may be treated as short-term capital losses of the acquiring corporation for its first taxable year ending after that date.
(1) Any capital loss carryover of a distributor or transferor corporation which is available to the acquiring corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall be a short-term capital loss of the acquiring corporation in each of the taxable years to which the net capital loss giving rise to such carryover may be carried to the extent provided in section 1212 and this section. However, in the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after the date of distribution or transfer, the total capital loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation which may be treated in that year as short-term capital losses of the acquiring corporation is limited by section 381(c)(3)(B) to an amount which bears the same ratio to the acquiring corporation's capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) for such first taxable year (determined without regard to any capital loss carryovers) as the number of days in such first taxable year which follow the date of distribution or transfer bears to the total number of days in such taxable year. Thus, if the date of distribution or transfer is the last day of the acquiring corporation's taxable year, there is no limitation under section 381(c)(3)(B) on the amount of such carryovers which may be treated as short-term capital losses of the acquiring corporation for its first taxable year ending after that date.
(2) The limitation provided by section 381(c)(3)(B) shall be applied to the aggregate of the capital loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation without reference to the taxable years in which the net capital losses giving rise to the carryovers were sustained. If the acquiring corporation has acquired the assets of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on the same date of distribution or transfer, then the limitation provided by section 381(c)(3)(B) shall be applied to the aggregate of the capital loss carryovers from all of such distributor or transferor corporations.
(3) If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the capital loss carryovers of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on two or more dates of distribution or transfer during the same taxable year of the acquiring corporation, the limitation to be applied under section 381(c)(3)(B) to the aggregate of such carryovers shall be determined consistently with the rules prescribed in paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-2.
(4) The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:
(i) X and Y Corporations are organized on January 1, 1954, and make their returns on the basis of the calendar year. On July 4, 1957, X Corporation transfers all its assets to Y Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The net capital losses and the net capital gains (capital gain net income for taxable years beginning after Dec. 31, 1976), (computed without regard to any capital loss carryovers) of the two corporations are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y
Taxable year Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1954......................................... ($5,000) 01955......................................... (10,000) $5,0001956......................................... (25,000) (7,000)Ending 7-4-57................................ (8,000) ...........1957......................................... ............ 36,500------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) The capital loss carryovers of X Corporation which are available to Y Corporation as of the close of July 4, 1957, amount to $48,000 in the aggregate; but only $18,000 ($36,500 x 180/365) of such amount may be treated as short-term capital losses of Y Corporation for 1957.
(d) Computation of carryovers; general rule--(1) Sequence for applying losses and determination of capital gain net income. Section 1212 provides that a net capital loss sustained in any taxable year (hereinafter referred to as the ``loss year'') shall be carried over to each of the five succeeding taxable years and treated in each of such succeeding years as a short-term capital loss to the extent not allowed as a deduction against any capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of any taxable years intervening between the loss year and the taxable year to which such loss is carried. For this purpose, the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of any intervening taxable year is determined without regard to the net capital loss for the loss year or for any taxable year thereafter, and the various capital loss carryovers from taxable years preceding the loss year to any such intervening taxable year are considered to be applied in reduction of the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) for such year in the order of the taxable years in which the losses were sustained, beginning with the loss for the earliest preceding taxable year. The application of these rules to the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of the acquiring corporation for any taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer involves the use of carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation and of the acquiring corporation. In determining the order in which the capital loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor and acquiring corporations from taxable years ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer are considered to be applied in reduction of the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of the acquiring corporation for any intervening taxable year ending after such date, the following rules shall apply:
(1) Sequence for applying losses and determination of capital gain net income. Section 1212 provides that a net capital loss sustained in any taxable year (hereinafter referred to as the ``loss year'') shall be carried over to each of the five succeeding taxable years and treated in each of such succeeding years as a short-term capital loss to the extent not allowed as a deduction against any capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of any taxable years intervening between the loss year and the taxable year to which such loss is carried. For this purpose, the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of any intervening taxable year is determined without regard to the net capital loss for the loss year or for any taxable year thereafter, and the various capital loss carryovers from taxable years preceding the loss year to any such intervening taxable year are considered to be applied in reduction of the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) for such year in the order of the taxable years in which the losses were sustained, beginning with the loss for the earliest preceding taxable year. The application of these rules to the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of the acquiring corporation for any taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer involves the use of carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation and of the acquiring corporation. In determining the order in which the capital loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor and acquiring corporations from taxable years ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer are considered to be applied in reduction of the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of the acquiring corporation for any intervening taxable year ending after such date, the following rules shall apply:
(i) Each taxable year of the distributor or transferor and acquiring corporations which, with respect to the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after the date of distribution or transfer, constitutes a first preceding taxable year, shall be treated as if each such year ended on the same day, whether or not such taxable years actually end on the same day. In like manner, each taxable year of the distributor or transferor and acquiring corporations which, with respect to such first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after the date of distribution or transfer, constitutes a second preceding taxable year, shall be treated as if each such year ended on the same day (whether or not such taxable years actually end on the same day), and a similar rule shall be applied with respect to those taxable years of the distributor or transferor and acquiring corporations which constitute third, fourth, and fifth preceding taxable years;
(ii) If in the same preceding taxable year both the distributor or transferor and acquiring corporations incurred a net capital loss which is a carryover to an intervening taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after the date of distribution or transfer, then in applying such losses in reduction of the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) for such an intervening year, either such loss may be taken into account before the other; and
(iii) The rules of subdivisions (i) and (ii) of this subparagraph shall apply regardless of the number of distributor or transferor corporations the assets of which are acquired by the acquiring corporation on the same date of distribution or transfer.
(2) Cross reference. If the date of distribution or transfer is a day other than the last day of a taxable year of the acquiring corporation, then in determining the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of the acquiring corporation for its first taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer, section 1212 and this paragraph shall be applied in the special manner set forth in paragraph (e) of this section.
(3) Years to which losses may be carried. The taxable years to which a net capital loss shall be carried are prescribed by section 1212. Since the taxable year of a distributor or transferor corporation ends with the close of the date of distribution or transfer, such taxable year and the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation which ends after that date are considered two separate taxable years to which a net capital loss of the distributor or transferor corporation for any taxable year ending before that date shall be carried. This rule applies even though the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation which ends on the date of distribution or transfer is a period of less than twelve months. However, the distribution or transfer has no effect in determining under section 1212 the taxable years to which a net capital loss of the acquiring corporation is carried. For this purpose, the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation which ends after the date of distribution or transfer constitutes only one taxable year even though such taxable year is considered under paragraph (e) of this section as two taxable years for certain purposes. The application of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. R and S Corporations are organized on January 1, 1954, and both corporations make their returns on the basis of the calendar year. R Corporation has net capital losses for its years 1954, 1955, and 1957, and S Corporation has net capital losses for its years 1954 and 1956. On June 30, 1958, R Corporation transfers all its assets to S Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The taxable years to which these losses of R and S Corporations may be carried are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Loss year Carried to------------------------------------------------------------------------R1954............................. R1955, R1956, R1957, R6/30/58,
S1958.S1954............................. S1955, S1956, S1957, S1958, S1959.R1955............................. R1956, R1957, R6/30/58, S1958,
S1959.S1956............................. S1957, S1958, S1959, S1960, S1961.R1957............................. R6/30/58, S1958, S1959, S1960,
S1961.------------------------------------------------------------------------
(4) Computation of carryovers in case where date of distribution or transfer occurs on last day of acquiring corporation's taxable year. The computation of the capital loss carryovers from the distributor or transferor corporation and from the acquiring corporation in a case where the date of distribution or transfer occurs on the last day of a taxable year of the acquiring corporation may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. X and Y Corporations are organized on January 1, 1955, and make their returns on the basis of the calendar year. On December 31, 1956, X Corporation transfers all its assets to Y Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The net capital losses and the net capital gains (capital gain net income for taxable years beginning after December 31, 1976), (computed without regard to any capital loss carryovers) of the two corporations are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y
Taxable year Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1955......................................... ($20,000) ($2,000)1956......................................... (10,000) (8,000)1957......................................... ............ 25,0001958......................................... ............ 10,000------------------------------------------------------------------------ The sequence in which the net capital losses of X and Y Corporations are applied, and the computation of the capital loss carryovers to Y Corporation's taxable year 1959, may be illustrated as follows. (For purposes of this example, the carryover from a preceding taxable year of the transferor corporation will be applied before the carryover from the same preceding taxable year of the acquiring corporation):
(i) X Corporation's 1955 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $0, computed as follows: Net capital loss............................................ $20,000Less: Y's 1957 net capital gain (computed without regard to 25,000
any capital loss carryovers)...............................
-----------
Carryover to Y 1958 and Y 1959............................ 0
(ii)Y Corporation's 1955 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $0, computed as follows: Net capital loss............................................. $2,000Less:
Y's 1957 net capital gain (computed without $25,000
regard to any capital loss carryovers)........
Minus capital loss carryovers to Y 1957 (i.e., 20,000
carryover of $20,000 from X 1955).............
------------
.......... 5,000
----------
Carryover to Y 1958 and Y 1959........................... 0
(iii) X Corporation's 1956 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $0, computed as follows: Net capital loss............................................ $10,000Less:
Y's 1957 net capital gain (computed without $25,000
regard to any capital loss carryovers).......
Minus capital loss carryovers to Y 1957 (i.e., 22,000
carryovers of $20,000 from X 1955 and $2,000
from Y 1955).................................
------------
.......... 3,000
-----------
Carryover to Y 1958..................................... 7,000Less:
Y's 1958 net capital gain (computed without $10,000
regard to any capital loss carryovers).......
Minus capital loss carryovers to Y 1958....... 0
------------
.......... 10,000
-----------
Carryover to Y 1959..................................... 0
(iv) Y Corporation's 1956 loss. The carryover to 1959 is $5,000, computed as follows: Net capital loss............................................. $8,000Less:
Y's 1957 net capital gain (computed without $25,000
regard to any capital loss carryovers)........
Minus capital loss carryovers to Y 1957 (i.e., 32,000
carryovers of $20,000 from X 1955, $2,000 from
Y 1955, and $10,000 from X 1956)..............
------------
.......... 0
----------
Carryover to Y 1958...................................... 8,000Less:
Y's 1958 net capital gain (computed without $10,000
regard to any capital loss carryovers)........
Minus capital loss carryovers to Y 1958 (i.e., 7,000
carryover of $7,000 from X 1956)..............
------------
.......... 3,000
----------
Carryover to Y 1959...................................... 5,000
(e) Computation of carryovers when date of distribution or transfer is not on last day of acquiring corporation's taxable year--(1) General rule. If, in determining under paragraph (d) of this section the portion of a net capital loss for any taxable year which is carried over to a succeeding taxable year, an intervening taxable year is a taxable year of the acquiring corporation which includes, but does not end on, the date of distribution or transfer, the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of such intervening year shall be determined by applying section 1212 in the special manner provided by this paragraph.
(1) General rule. If, in determining under paragraph (d) of this section the portion of a net capital loss for any taxable year which is carried over to a succeeding taxable year, an intervening taxable year is a taxable year of the acquiring corporation which includes, but does not end on, the date of distribution or transfer, the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of such intervening year shall be determined by applying section 1212 in the special manner provided by this paragraph.
(2) Taxable year considered as two taxable years. Such intervening taxable year of the acquiring corporation shall be considered as though it were two taxable years, but only for the limited purpose of computing capital loss carryovers to subsequent taxable years. The first of such two taxable years shall be referred to in this paragraph as the preacquisition part year; the second, as the postacquisition part year. Though considered as two separate taxable years for purposes of this paragraph, the preacquisition part year and the postacquisition part year are treated as one taxable year in determining the years to which a net capital loss is carried under section 1212. See paragraph (d)(3) of this section.
(3) Preacquisition part year. The preacquisition part year shall begin with the beginning of such taxable year of the acquiring corporation and shall end with the close of the date of distribution or transfer.
(4) Postacquisition part year. The postacquisition part year shall begin with the day following the date of distribution or transfer and shall end with the close of such taxable year of the acquiring corporation.
(5) Division of capital gain net income. The capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) for such intervening taxable year (computed without regard to any capital loss carryovers) of the acquiring corporation shall be divided between the preacquisition part year and the postacquisition part year in proportion to the number of days in each. Thus, if in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies Y Corporation acquires the assets of X Corporation on June 30, 1956, and Y Corporation has net capital gain (computed in the manner so prescribed) of $36,600 for its calendar year 1956, then the preacquisition part year capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) would be $18,200 ($36,600x182/366) and the postacquisition part year capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) would be $18,400 ($36,600x184/366).
(6) Application of capital loss carryovers. After obtaining the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of the preacquisition part year and postacquisition part year in the manner described in subparagraph (5) of this paragraph, it is necessary to determine the capital loss carryovers which are taken into account with respect to each such part year. The carryovers to be taken into account and the sequence in which such carryovers are applied, shall be determined in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section but subject to the provisions of this subparagraph. With respect to the preacquisition part year, no capital loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation shall be taken into account; that is, only capital loss carryovers of the acquiring corporation shall be taken into account. With respect to the postacquisition part year, capital loss carryovers of both the distributor or transferor corporation and the acquiring corporation shall be taken into account.
(7) Cross reference. If an intervening taxable year is a taxable year of the acquiring corporation during which the acquiring corporation succeeds to the capital loss carryovers of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on two or more dates of distribution or transfer, the capital gain net income (net capital gain for taxable years beginning before January 1, 1977) of the acquiring corporation for such intervening taxable year shall be determined consistently with the rules prescribed in paragraph (c) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-2, except that the sequence in which the capital loss carryovers of the distributor or transferor and acquiring corporations shall be applied shall be determined under paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
(8) Illustration. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated as follows:
Example. X Corporation is organized on April 1, 1959, and makes its return on the basis of the fiscal year ending March 31. Y Corporation is organized on January 1, 1959, and makes its return on the basis of the calendar year. On June 30, 1961, X Corporation transfers all its assets to Y Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. The net capital losses and the net capital gains (capital gain net income for taxable years beginning after December 31, 1976) (computed without regard to any capital loss carryovers) of the two corporations are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y
Taxable year Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1959......................................... ............ ($24,000)Ending 3-31-60............................... ($19,000)1960......................................... ............ (6,000)Ending 3-31-61............................... (5,000)Ending 6-30-61............................... 01961......................................... ............ 36,5001962......................................... ............ 12,000------------------------------------------------------------------------ The following table shows those taxable years of the transferor and acquiring corporations which, with respect to Y Corporation's calendar year 1961, are first, second, and third preceding taxable years: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Y
Taxable year X Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------First preceding year............... Ending June 30, 1961.. 1960Second preceding year.............. Ending March 31, 1961. 1959Third preceding year............... Ending March 31, 1960.------------------------------------------------------------------------ The sequence in which the net capital losses of X and Y Corporations are applied, and the computation of the capital loss carryovers to Y Corporation's calendar year 1963, may be illustrated as follows. (For purposes of this example, the carryover from a preceding taxable year of the acquiring corporation will be applied before the carryover from the same preceding taxable year of the transferor corporation):
(i) X Corporation's 3/31/60 loss. The carryover to 1963 is $0, computed as follows: Net capital loss............................................ $19,000Less: Y's postacquisition part year net capital gain 18,400
computed under subparagraph (5) of this paragraph ($36,500x
184/365)...................................................
-----------
Carryover to Y 1962....................................... 600Less: Y's 1962 net capital gain (computed without regard to 12,000
any capital loss carryovers)...............................
-----------
Carryover to Y 1963....................................... 0
(ii) Y Corporation's 1959 loss. The carryover to 1963 is $0, computed as follows: Net capital loss............................................ $24,000Less: Y's preacquisition part year net capital gain computed 18,100
under subparagraph (5) of this paragraph ($36,500x 181/365)
-------------
Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year................ 5,900Less:
Y's postacquisition part year net capital gain $18,400
computed under subparagraph (5) of this
paragraph....................................
Minus capital loss carryovers to 19,000 0
postacquisition part year (i.e., carryover of
$19,000 from X 3/31/60)......................
-----------------------
Carryover to Y 1962..................................... 5,900Less:
Y's 1962 net capital gain (computed without $12,000
regard to any capital loss carryovers).......
Minus capital loss carryovers to Y 1962 (i.e., 600 11,400
carryover of $600 from X 3/31/60)............
-----------------------
Carryover to Y 1963..................................... 0
(iii) X Corporation's 3/31/61 loss. The carryover to 1963 is $0, computed as follows: Net capital loss............................................. $5,000Less:
Y's postacquisition part year net capital gain $18,400
computed under subparagraph (5) of this
paragraph.....................................
Minus capital loss carryovers to 24,900
postacquisition part year (i.e., carryovers of
$19,000 from X 3/31/60 and $5,900 from Y 1959)
------------
.......... 0
----------
Carryover to Y 1962...................................... 5,000Less:
Y's 1962 net capital gain (computed without $12,000
regard to any capital loss carryovers)........
Minus capital loss carryovers to Y 1962 (i.e., 6,500
carryovers of $600 from X 3/31/60 and $5,900
from Y 1959)..................................
------------
.......... 5,500
----------
Carryover to Y 1963...................................... 0
(iv) Y Corporation's 1960 loss. The carryover to 1963 is $5,500, computed as follows: Net capital loss............................................. $6,000Less:
Y's preacquisition part year net capital gain $18,100
computed under subparagraph (5) of this
paragraph.....................................
Minus capital loss carryovers to preacquisition 24,000
part year (i.e., carryover of $24,000 from Y
1959).........................................
------------
.......... 0
----------
Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year............... 6,000Less:
Y's postacquisition part year net capital gain $18,400
computed under subparagraph (5) of this
paragraph.....................................
Minus capital loss carryovers to 29,900 0
postacquisition part year (i.e., carryovers of
$19,000 from X 3/31/60, $5,900 from Y 1959,
and $5,000 from X 3/31/61)....................
----------
.......... 0
----------
Carryover to Y 1962...................................... 6,000Less:
Y's 1962 net capital gain (computed without $12,000
regard to any capital loss carryovers)........
Minus capital loss carryovers to Y 1962 (i.e., 11,5000
carryovers of $600 from X 3/31/60, $5,900 from
Y 1959, and $5,000 from X 3/31/61)............
------------
.......... $500
----------
Carryover to Y 1963...................................... 5,500
(f) Successive acquiring corporations. An acquiring corporation which, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, acquires the assets of a distributor or transferor corporation which previously acquired the assets of another corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, shall succeed to and take into account, subject to the conditions and limitations of sections 1212 and 381, the capital loss carryovers available to the first acquiring corporation under sections 1212 and 381. [T.D. 6552, 26 FR 1985, Mar. 8, 1961, as amended by T.D. 6867, 30 FR 15094, Dec. 12, 1965; T.D. 7728, 45 FR 72650, Nov. 3, 1980] Sec. 1.381(c)(4)-1 Method of accounting.
(a) Introduction--(1) Purpose. This section provides guidance regarding the method of accounting or combination of methods (other than inventory and depreciation methods) an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(4) apply and how to implement any associated change in method of accounting. See Sec. 1.381(c)(5)-1 for guidance regarding the inventory method an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(5) apply. See Sec. 1.381(c)(6)-1 for guidance regarding the depreciation method an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(6) apply.
(1) Purpose. This section provides guidance regarding the method of accounting or combination of methods (other than inventory and depreciation methods) an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(4) apply and how to implement any associated change in method of accounting. See Sec. 1.381(c)(5)-1 for guidance regarding the inventory method an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(5) apply. See Sec. 1.381(c)(6)-1 for guidance regarding the depreciation method an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(6) apply.
(2) Carryover method requirement for separate and distinct trades or businesses. In a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, if an acquiring corporation continues to operate a trade or business of the parties to the section 381(a) transaction as a separate and distinct trade or business after the date of distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation must use a carryover method as defined in paragraph (b)(5) of this section for each continuing trade or business, unless either the carryover method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or the acquiring corporation changes the carryover method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. The carryover method requirement applies to the overall method of accounting (for example, an accrual method of accounting) and any special method of accounting (for example, the percentage of completion method of accounting described in section 460) as defined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section used by each trade or business after the date of distribution or transfer. The acquiring corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to continue a carryover method.
(3) Principal method requirement for trades or businesses not operated as separate and distinct trades or businesses. In a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, if an acquiring corporation does not operate the trades or businesses of the parties to the section 381(a) transaction as separate and distinct trades or businesses after the date of distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation must use a principal method determined under paragraph (c) of this section, unless either the principal method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or the acquiring corporation changes the principal method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. The principal method requirement applies to the overall method of accounting (for example, the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting) and any special method of accounting (for example, the installment method under section 453) as defined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section used by each integrated trade or business after the date of distribution or transfer. The acquiring corporation must change to a principal method in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section for each integrated trade or business and need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use a principal method.
(4) Carryover method or principal method not a permissible method. If a carryover method or principal method is not a permissible method of accounting, the acquiring corporation must secure the Commissioner's consent to change to a permissible method of accounting as provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section. If the acquiring corporation must use a single method of accounting for a particular item after the date of distribution or transfer regardless of the number of separate and distinct trades or businesses operated on that date, the acquiring corporation must use the principal method for that item as determined under paragraph (c) of this section, unless either the principal method is impermissible and must be changed under this paragraph (a)(4) or the acquiring corporation changes the principal method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section.
(5) Voluntary change. Any party to a section 381(a) transaction may request permission under section 446(e) to change a method of accounting for the taxable year in which the transaction occurs or is expected to occur. For trades or businesses that will not operate as separate and distinct trades or businesses after the date of distribution or transfer, a change in method of accounting for the taxable year that includes that date will be granted only if the requested method is the method that the acquiring corporation must use after the date of distribution or transfer. The time and manner of obtaining the Commissioner's consent to change to a different method of accounting is described in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(6) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (a). Unless otherwise noted, the carryover method is a permissible method of accounting.
(i) Facts. X Corporation operates an employment agency that uses the overall cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting. T Corporation operates an educational institution that uses an overall accrual method of accounting. X Corporation acquires the assets of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation operates the employment agency as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from the educational institution.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation operates the employment agency as a separate and distinct trade or business, under paragraph (a)(2) of this section X Corporation must use the carryover method for each continuing trade or business, unless either the carryover method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the carryover method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. As defined in paragraph (b)(5) of this section, the carryover method for the employment agency is the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting and the carryover method for the educational institution is the accrual method of accounting used by T Corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. There is no change in method of accounting, and X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use either carryover method.
(i) Facts. X Corporation provides personal grooming consulting and T Corporation provides weight management consulting. Both X Corporation and T Corporation use the same overall accrual method of accounting. X Corporation has elected to use the recurring item exception under Sec. 1.461-5. T Corporation does not use the recurring item exception. X Corporation acquires the assets of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation operates the personal grooming consulting business as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from the weight management consulting business.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation operates the personal grooming consulting business as a separate and distinct trade or business, under paragraph (a)(2) of this section X Corporation must use a carryover method for each continuing trade or business, unless either the carryover method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the carryover method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. As defined in paragraph (b)(5) of this section, the carryover method for the overall method of accounting for each trade or business is the accrual method used immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. The carryover method for the special method of accounting for the personal grooming consulting business is the recurring item exception under Sec. 1.461-5 while the carryover method for the weight management consulting business is not to use the recurring item exception under Sec. 1.461-5. There is no change in method of accounting, and X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use the carryover methods of accounting.
(i) Facts. X Corporation is an engineering firm that uses the overall cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting and has elected under section 171 to amortize bond premium with respect to its taxable bonds acquired at a premium. T Corporation is a manufacturer that uses an overall accrual method of accounting and has not made a section 171 election to amortize bond premium with respect to its taxable bonds acquired at a premium. X Corporation acquires the assets of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation operates the engineering firm as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from the manufacturing business.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation operates the engineering firm as a separate and distinct trade or business, under paragraph (a)(2) of this section X Corporation must use a carryover method for each continuing trade or business, unless either the carryover method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the carryover method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. As defined in paragraph (b)(5) of this section, the carryover method for the overall method of accounting for the engineering firm is the cash receipts and disbursements method used by X Corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer, and the carryover method for the overall method of accounting for the manufacturing business is the accrual method used by T Corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. There is no change in method of accounting, and X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use either carryover method. Notwithstanding that after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation has two separate and distinct trades or businesses, X Corporation is permitted only one method of accounting for amortizable bond premium under section 171. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation must use a single method of accounting for bond premium for all trades or businesses, X Corporation must use the principal method for that item as determined under paragraph (c) of this section, unless either the principal method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes that method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. X Corporation must change to the principal method in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section. If amortizing bond premium is not the principal method, X Corporation may make an election to amortize bond premium to the extent permitted by section 171. See paragraph (e)(2) of this section for rules on making elections.
(b) Definitions. For purposes of this section--
(1) Method of accounting. A method of accounting has the same meaning as provided in section 446 and any applicable Income Tax Regulations.
(2) Special method of accounting. A special method of accounting is a method expressly permitted or required by the Internal Revenue Code, Income Tax Regulations, or administrative guidance published in the Internal Revenue Bulletin that deviates from the normal application of the cash receipts and disbursements method or an accrual method of accounting. The installment method under section 453, the mark-to-market method under section 475, the amortization of bond premium under section 171, the percentage of completion method under section 460, the recurring item exception of Sec. 1.461-5, and the income deferral methods under section 455 and Sec. 1.451-5 are examples of special methods of accounting. See Sec. 1.446-1(c)(1)(iii).
(3) Adoption of a method of accounting. Adoption of a method of accounting has the same meaning as provided in Sec. 1.446-1(e)(1).
(4) Change in method of accounting. A change in method of accounting has the same meaning as provided in Sec. 1.446-1(e)(2).
(5) Carryover method. A carryover method for the overall method of accounting is the overall method of accounting that each party to a section 381(a) transaction uses for each separate and distinct trade or business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. The carryover method for a special method of accounting for an item is the special method of accounting for that item that each party to a section 381(a) transaction uses for each separate and distinct trade or business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer.
(6) Principal method. A principal method is an overall or special method of accounting that is determined under paragraph (c) of this section.
(7) Permissible method of accounting. A permissible method of accounting is a method of accounting that is proper or permitted under the Internal Revenue Code or any applicable Income Tax Regulations.
(8) Acquiring corporation. An acquiring corporation has the same meaning as provided in Sec. 1.381(a)-1(b)(2).
(9) Distributor corporation. A distributor corporation means the corporation, foreign or domestic, that distributes its assets to another corporation described in section 332(b) in a distribution to which section 332 (relating to liquidations of subsidiaries) applies.
(10) Transferor corporation. A transferor corporation means the corporation, foreign or domestic, that transfers its assets to another corporation in a transfer to which section 361 (relating to nonrecognition of gain or loss to corporations) applies, but only if--
(i) The transfer is in connection with a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(A), (a)(1)(C), or (a)(1)(F), or
(ii) The transfer is in connection with a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(D) or (a)(1)(G), provided the requirements of section 354(b) are met.
(11) Parties to the section 381(a) transaction. Parties to the section 381(a) transaction means the acquiring corporation and the distributor or transferor corporation that participate in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies.
(12) Date of distribution or transfer. The date of distribution or transfer has the same meaning as provided in section 381(b)(2) and Sec. 1.381(b)-1(b).
(13) Separate and distinct trades or businesses. Separate and distinct trades or businesses has the same meaning as provided in Sec. 1.446-1(d).
(14) Gross receipts. Gross receipts means all the receipts, including amounts that are excludible from gross income, that must be taken into account under the method of accounting used in a representative period (determined without regard to this section) for federal income tax purposes. For example, gross receipts includes income from investments, amounts received for services, rents, total sales (net of returns and allowances), and both taxable and tax-exempt interest. See paragraph (e)(5) of this section for rules on determining the representative period.
(15) Audit protection. Audit protection means, for purposes of paragraph (d)(1) of this section, that the IRS will not require an acquiring corporation that is required to change a method of accounting under paragraph (a)(3) of this section to change that method for a taxable year ending prior to the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer.
(16) Section 481(a) adjustment. The section 481(a) adjustment means an adjustment that must be taken into account as required under section 481(a) to prevent amounts from being duplicated or omitted when the taxable income of an acquiring corporation is computed under a method of accounting different from the method used to compute taxable income for the preceding taxable year.
(17) Cut-off basis. A cut-off basis means a manner in which a change in method of accounting is made without a section 481(a) adjustment and under which only the items arising after the beginning of the year of change (or, in the case of a change made under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, after the date of distribution or transfer) are accounted for under the new method of accounting.
(18) Adjustment period. The adjustment period means the number of taxable years for taking into account the section 481(a) adjustment required as a result of a change in method of accounting.
(19) Component trade or business. A component trade or business is a trade or business of a party to the section 381(a) transaction that will be combined and integrated with a trade or business of the other party to the section 381 transaction. See paragraph (e)(4)(ii) of this section for the determination of whether a trade or business is operated as a separate and distinct trade or business after the date of distribution or transfer.
(c) Principal method--(1) In general. For each integrated trade or business, the principal method is generally the method of accounting used by the component trade or business of the acquiring corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. If, however, the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation is larger than the component trade or business of the acquiring corporation on the date of distribution or transfer, the principal method is the method used by the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation immediately prior to that date. If the larger component trade or business does not have a special method of accounting for a particular item immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer, the principal method for that item is the method of accounting used by the component trade or business that does have a special method of accounting for that item. See paragraph (e)(9) of this section for special rules concerning methods of accounting that are elected on a project-by-project, job-by-job, or other similar basis. For each integrated trade or business, the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation is larger than the component trade or business of the acquiring corporation on the date of distribution or transfer if--
(1) In general. For each integrated trade or business, the principal method is generally the method of accounting used by the component trade or business of the acquiring corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. If, however, the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation is larger than the component trade or business of the acquiring corporation on the date of distribution or transfer, the principal method is the method used by the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation immediately prior to that date. If the larger component trade or business does not have a special method of accounting for a particular item immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer, the principal method for that item is the method of accounting used by the component trade or business that does have a special method of accounting for that item. See paragraph (e)(9) of this section for special rules concerning methods of accounting that are elected on a project-by-project, job-by-job, or other similar basis. For each integrated trade or business, the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation is larger than the component trade or business of the acquiring corporation on the date of distribution or transfer if--
(i) The aggregate of the adjusted bases of the assets held by each component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation (determined under section 1011 and any applicable Income Tax Regulations) exceeds the aggregate of the adjusted bases of the assets of each component trade or business of the acquiring corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer, and
(ii) The aggregate of the gross receipts for a representative period of each component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation exceeds the aggregate of the gross receipts for the same period of each component trade or business of the acquiring corporation. See paragraph (e)(5) of this section for rules on determining the representative period.
(2) Multiple component trades or businesses with different principal methods. If a party to the section 381(a) transaction has multiple component trades or businesses and more than one principal overall method of accounting or more than one principal special method of accounting for an item, then the acquiring corporation may choose which of the principal methods of accounting used by such component trades or businesses will be the principal methods of the integrated trade or business. The acquiring corporation must choose a principal method that is a permissible method of accounting. In general, a change to a principal method in a transaction to which section 381(a) and paragraph (a)(3) of this section applies is made under paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
(3) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (c). Unless otherwise noted, the principal method is a permissible method of accounting.
(i) Facts. X Corporation and T Corporation each operate an employment agency. X Corporation uses the overall cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting, and T Corporation uses an overall accrual method of accounting. X Corporation acquires the assets of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. The adjusted bases of the assets in X Corporation's employment agency immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer exceed the adjusted bases of the assets in T Corporation's employment agency, and the gross receipts in X Corporation's employment agency for the representative period exceed the gross receipts of T Corporation's employment agency for the period. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation's employment agency will not be operated as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from T Corporation's employment agency.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation will not operate its employment agency as a separate and distinct trade or business, X Corporation must use a principal method under paragraph (a)(3) of this section, unless either the principal method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the principal method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. Because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation's employment agency is not larger than X Corporation's employment agency, the principal method for the overall method of accounting is the cash receipts and disbursements method used by X Corporation's employment agency. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use this method of accounting. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the method of accounting for the employment agency acquired from T Corporation to the cash receipts and disbursements method.
(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example (1), except that the gross receipts of T Corporation's employment agency for the representative period exceed the gross receipts of X Corporation's employment agency for the period.
(ii) Conclusion. The result is the same as in Example (1). Although the gross receipts of T Corporation's employment agency exceed the gross receipts of X Corporation's employment agency, T Corporation's employment agency is not larger than X Corporation's employment agency because the adjusted bases of the assets of T Corporation's employment agency do not exceed the adjusted bases of the assets of X Corporation's employment agency. Thus, the principal method for the overall method of accounting is the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting used by X Corporation's employment agency immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use this method of accounting. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the method of accounting for the employment agency business acquired from T Corporation to the cash receipts and disbursements method.
(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example (2), except that the adjusted bases of the assets held by T Corporation's employment agency immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer exceed the adjusted bases of the assets held by X Corporation's employment agency.
(ii) Conclusion. The principal method for the overall method of accounting is the accrual method of accounting used by T Corporation's employment agency immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation's employment agency is larger than X Corporation's employment agency. The adjusted bases of the assets of T Corporation's employment agency exceed the adjusted bases of the assets of X Corporation's employment agency, and the gross receipts of T Corporation's employment agency exceed the gross receipts of X Corporation's employment agency. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use this method of accounting. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the method of accounting for the employment agency business it operated prior to the date of distribution or transfer to the accrual method of accounting used by T Corporation's employment agency immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer.
(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example (1), except that X Corporation is prohibited under section 448 from using the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting after the date of distribution or transfer.
(ii) Conclusion. Because section 448 prohibits X Corporation from using the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting, X Corporation is not permitted to use the principal method for the overall method of accounting as determined in Example (1). Because after the date of distribution or transfer that method is not a permissible method, under paragraph (a)(4) of this section X Corporation must secure the Commissioner's consent to change to a permissible method in accordance with the procedures set forth in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example (4), except that T Corporation wants to discontinue using the overall accrual method of accounting for its employment agency and change to the cash receipts and disbursements method for the taxable year in which the section 381(a) transaction occurs or is expected to occur.
(ii) Conclusion. Under paragraph (a)(5) of this section, the Commissioner will grant a request to change a method of accounting for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer only if the requested method is the method that the acquiring corporation must use after the date of distribution or transfer. The Commissioner will not consent to a request by T Corporation to change to the cash receipts and disbursements method for the taxable year in which the section 381(a) transaction occurs or is expected to occur because X Corporation cannot use the cash receipts and disbursements method after the date of distribution or transfer.
(i) Facts. X Corporation and T Corporation each publishes magazines. X Corporation acquires the assets of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. Both X Corporation and T Corporation use an overall accrual method of accounting. X Corporation has elected to defer income from its subscription sales under section 455. T Corporation has not elected to defer income from its subscription sales under section 455 and instead has recognized the income from these sales in accordance with section 451. The adjusted bases of the assets in X Corporation's publication business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer exceed the adjusted bases of the assets in T Corporation's publication business, and the gross receipts in X Corporation's publication business for the representative period exceed the gross receipts in T Corporation's publication business for the representative period. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation will not operate its publication business as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from T Corporation's publication business.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation will not operate its publication business as a separate and distinct trade or business, X Corporation must use the principal method under paragraph (a)(3) of this section, unless either the principal method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the principal method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. The adjusted bases of the assets in T Corporation's publication business do not exceed the adjusted bases of the assets in X Corporation's publication business, and the gross receipts in T Corporation's publication business do not exceed the gross receipts in X Corporation's publication business. Because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation's publication business is not larger than X Corporation's publication business, the principal method for the overall method of accounting is the accrual method used by X Corporation's publication business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. The principal method for subscription sales is the section 455 deferral method used by X Corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal method for either the overall method of accounting or the special method of accounting. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change both the overall method of accounting and the special method of accounting for the publication business acquired from T Corporation to the accrual method and the section 455 deferral method used by X Corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer.
(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example (6), except that the adjusted bases of the assets in T Corporation's publication business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer exceed the adjusted bases of the assets in X Corporation's business.
(ii) Conclusion. The result is the same as in Example (6). Because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation's publication business is not larger than X Corporation's publication business, the principal method for the overall method of accounting is the accrual method used by X Corporation's publication business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. The principal method for subscription sales is the section 455 deferral method used by X Corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal method for either the overall method of accounting or the special method of accounting. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change both the overall method of accounting and the special method of accounting for the publication business acquired from T Corporation to the accrual method and the section 455 deferral method used by X Corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer.
(i) Facts. X Corporation and T Corporation both install ice skating rinks. Both X Corporation and T Corporation use an overall accrual method of accounting for their respective businesses. X Corporation completes its installation contracts within the contracting year and uses an accrual method of accounting to recognize the revenue from its installation contracts. T Corporation's installation contracts are subject to section 460, and T Corporation recognizes the revenue from such contracts under the percentage-of-completion method. X Corporation acquires the assets of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. The adjusted bases of the assets in X Corporation's installation business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer exceed the adjusted bases of the assets in T Corporation's installation business, and the gross receipts in X Corporation's installation business for the representative period exceed the gross receipts in T Corporation's installation business for the representative period. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation will not operate its installation business as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from T Corporation's installation business.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation will not operate its installation business as a separate and distinct trade or business, X Corporation must use a principal method under paragraph (a)(3) of this section, unless either the principal method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the principal method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. The adjusted bases of the assets in T Corporation's installation business do not exceed the adjusted bases of the assets in X Corporation's installation business, and the gross receipts in T Corporation's installation business do not exceed the gross receipts in X Corporation's installation business. Because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation's installation business is not larger than X Corporation's installation business, the principal method for the overall method of accounting is the accrual method used by X Corporation's installation business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal method for the overall method of accounting. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the overall method of accounting for the installation business acquired from T Corporation to the accrual method used by X Corporation. Under paragraph (c) of this section, the principal method for T Corporation's long-term contracts is the percentage-of-completion method used by T Corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer because X Corporation's installation business does not have a method of accounting for long-term contracts. There is no change in method of accounting, and X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use T Corporation's percentage-of-completion method.
(i) Facts. X Corporation operates a tennis academy as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from its trade or business of operating a golf academy. X Corporation uses the overall cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting for the tennis academy and an overall accrual method of accounting for the golf academy. T Corporation operates a tennis academy and uses an accrual method of accounting for the overall method. X Corporation acquires the assets of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation will not operate its tennis academy as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from T Corporation's tennis academy. X Corporation will continue to operate its golf academy as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from the operation of the tennis academy. The adjusted bases of the assets in T Corporation's tennis academy exceed the adjusted bases of the assets in X Corporation's tennis academy immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. The gross receipts of T Corporation's tennis academy for the representative period exceed the gross receipts of X Corporation's tennis academy for that period.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation will not operate its tennis academy as a separate and distinct trade or business, X Corporation must use a principal method under paragraph (a)(3) of this section, unless either the principal method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the principal method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. Because on the date of distribution or transfer the tennis academy operated by T Corporation is larger than the tennis academy operated by X Corporation, the principal method for the overall method of accounting for the combined tennis academy business is the accrual method used by T Corporation's tennis academy immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal method for the overall method of accounting. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the method of accounting for its tennis academy to the accrual method. Because X Corporation will operate the golf academy as a separate trade or business, under paragraph (a)(2) of this section X Corporation must continue to use the accrual method that it used immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer as the carryover method for the golf academy. There is no change in method of accounting, and X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use the carryover method.
(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example (9), except that after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation will not operate its golf academy as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from the tennis academy. In addition, X Corporation's component trades or businesses are larger than T Corporation's component trade or business: (1) the adjusted bases of the assets of X Corporation's tennis academy and golf academy businesses, in the aggregate, exceed the adjusted bases of the assets held by T Corporation's tennis academy; and (2) the gross receipts for the representative period of X Corporation's tennis academy and golf academy businesses, in the aggregate, exceed the gross receipts in T Corporation's tennis academy.
(ii) Conclusion. Because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation's tennis academy is not larger than X Corporation's combined tennis academy and golf academy, the principal method for the overall method of accounting is the method of accounting used by the component trades or businesses of X Corporation that will be combined with T Corporation's component trade or business on that date. Because on the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation operates two component trades or businesses with different overall methods of accounting that will be integrated after the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation may choose under paragraph (c)(2) of this section which overall method (and any special method of accounting) used by its component trades or businesses will be the principal method. X Corporation may choose to use either the accrual method used by the golf academy or the cash receipts and disbursements method used by its tennis academy as the principal method after the date of distribution or transfer, if either method is a permissible method. In accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change T Corporation's overall method of accounting to the principal method. Under paragraph (a)(3) of this section, X Corporation also must change either its golf academy business or its tennis academy business, depending on which principal method X Corporation selects, to the principal method.
(d) Procedures for changing a method of accounting--(1) Change made to principal method under paragraph (a)(3) of this section--(i) Section 481(a) adjustment--(A) In general. An acquiring corporation that changes its method of accounting or the distributor or transferor corporation's method of accounting under paragraph (a)(3) of this section does not need to secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal method. To the extent the use of a principal method constitutes a change in method of accounting, the change in method is treated as a change initiated by the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 481(a)(2). Any change to a principal method, whether the change relates to a trade or business of the acquiring corporation or a trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation, must be reflected on the acquiring corporation's federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. The amount of the section 481(a) adjustment and the adjustment period, if any, necessary to implement a change to the principal method are determined under Sec. 1.446-1(e) and the applicable administrative procedures that govern voluntary changes in methods of accounting under section 446(e). If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require that a method of accounting be implemented on a cut-off basis, the acquiring corporation must implement the change on a cut-off basis as of the date of distribution or transfer on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require a section 481(a) adjustment, the acquiring corporation must determine the section 481(a) adjustment and include the appropriate amount of the section 481(a) adjustment on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer and subsequent taxable year(s), as necessary. This adjustment is determined by the acquiring corporation as of the beginning of the day that is immediately after the date of distribution or transfer.
(1) Change made to principal method under paragraph (a)(3) of this section--(i) Section 481(a) adjustment--(A) In general. An acquiring corporation that changes its method of accounting or the distributor or transferor corporation's method of accounting under paragraph (a)(3) of this section does not need to secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal method. To the extent the use of a principal method constitutes a change in method of accounting, the change in method is treated as a change initiated by the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 481(a)(2). Any change to a principal method, whether the change relates to a trade or business of the acquiring corporation or a trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation, must be reflected on the acquiring corporation's federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. The amount of the section 481(a) adjustment and the adjustment period, if any, necessary to implement a change to the principal method are determined under Sec. 1.446-1(e) and the applicable administrative procedures that govern voluntary changes in methods of accounting under section 446(e). If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require that a method of accounting be implemented on a cut-off basis, the acquiring corporation must implement the change on a cut-off basis as of the date of distribution or transfer on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require a section 481(a) adjustment, the acquiring corporation must determine the section 481(a) adjustment and include the appropriate amount of the section 481(a) adjustment on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer and subsequent taxable year(s), as necessary. This adjustment is determined by the acquiring corporation as of the beginning of the day that is immediately after the date of distribution or transfer.
(i) Section 481(a) adjustment--(A) In general. An acquiring corporation that changes its method of accounting or the distributor or transferor corporation's method of accounting under paragraph (a)(3) of this section does not need to secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal method. To the extent the use of a principal method constitutes a change in method of accounting, the change in method is treated as a change initiated by the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 481(a)(2). Any change to a principal method, whether the change relates to a trade or business of the acquiring corporation or a trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation, must be reflected on the acquiring corporation's federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. The amount of the section 481(a) adjustment and the adjustment period, if any, necessary to implement a change to the principal method are determined under Sec. 1.446-1(e) and the applicable administrative procedures that govern voluntary changes in methods of accounting under section 446(e). If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require that a method of accounting be implemented on a cut-off basis, the acquiring corporation must implement the change on a cut-off basis as of the date of distribution or transfer on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require a section 481(a) adjustment, the acquiring corporation must determine the section 481(a) adjustment and include the appropriate amount of the section 481(a) adjustment on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer and subsequent taxable year(s), as necessary. This adjustment is determined by the acquiring corporation as of the beginning of the day that is immediately after the date of distribution or transfer.
(A) In general. An acquiring corporation that changes its method of accounting or the distributor or transferor corporation's method of accounting under paragraph (a)(3) of this section does not need to secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal method. To the extent the use of a principal method constitutes a change in method of accounting, the change in method is treated as a change initiated by the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 481(a)(2). Any change to a principal method, whether the change relates to a trade or business of the acquiring corporation or a trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation, must be reflected on the acquiring corporation's federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. The amount of the section 481(a) adjustment and the adjustment period, if any, necessary to implement a change to the principal method are determined under Sec. 1.446-1(e) and the applicable administrative procedures that govern voluntary changes in methods of accounting under section 446(e). If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require that a method of accounting be implemented on a cut-off basis, the acquiring corporation must implement the change on a cut-off basis as of the date of distribution or transfer on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require a section 481(a) adjustment, the acquiring corporation must determine the section 481(a) adjustment and include the appropriate amount of the section 481(a) adjustment on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer and subsequent taxable year(s), as necessary. This adjustment is determined by the acquiring corporation as of the beginning of the day that is immediately after the date of distribution or transfer.
(B) Example. The following example illustrates the rules of this paragraph (d)(1)(i):
Example. X Corporation uses the overall cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting, and T Corporation uses an overall accrual method of accounting. X Corporation acquires the assets of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. X Corporation determines that under the rules of paragraph (c)(1) of this section X Corporation must change the method of accounting for the business acquired from T Corporation to the cash receipts and disbursements method. X Corporation will determine the section 481(a) adjustment pertaining to the change to the cash receipts and disbursements method by consolidating the adjustments (whether the amounts thereof represent increases or decreases in items of income or deductions) arising with respect to balances in the various accounts, such as accounts receivable, as of the beginning of the day that immediately follows the day on which X Corporation acquires the assets of T Corporation. X Corporation will reflect this adjustment, or an appropriate part thereof, on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer.
(ii) Audit protection. Notwithstanding any other provision in any other Income Tax Regulation or administrative procedure, no audit protection is provided for any change in method of accounting under paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
(iii) Other terms and conditions. Except as otherwise provided in this section, other terms and conditions provided in Sec. 1.446-1(e) and the applicable administrative procedures for voluntary changes in method of accounting under section 446(e) apply to a change in method of accounting under this section. Thus, for example, if the administrative procedures for a particular change in method of accounting have a term and condition that provides for the acceleration of the section 481(a) adjustment period, this term and condition applies to a change made under this paragraph (d)(1). However, any scope limitation in the applicable administrative procedures will not apply for purposes of making a change under this paragraph (d)(1). For example, if the administrative procedures provide as a limitation that an identical change in method of accounting is barred for a period of years, this limitation will not bar a change to the principal method made under this section.
(2) Change made to a method of accounting under paragraph (a)(4) or (a)(5) of this section--(i) In general. A party to a section 381(a) transaction that changes a method of accounting under either paragraph (a)(4) or paragraph (a)(5) of this section must follow the provisions of Sec. 1.446-(1)(e) and the applicable administrative procedures, including scope limitations, for voluntary changes in method of accounting under section 446(e), except as provided in paragraphs (d)(2)(ii) and (d)(2)(iii) of this section. An application on Form 3115, ``Application for Change in Accounting Method,'' filed with the IRS to change a method of accounting under this paragraph (d)(2) should be labeled ``Filed under section 381(c)(4)'' at the top.
(i) In general. A party to a section 381(a) transaction that changes a method of accounting under either paragraph (a)(4) or paragraph (a)(5) of this section must follow the provisions of Sec. 1.446-(1)(e) and the applicable administrative procedures, including scope limitations, for voluntary changes in method of accounting under section 446(e), except as provided in paragraphs (d)(2)(ii) and (d)(2)(iii) of this section. An application on Form 3115, ``Application for Change in Accounting Method,'' filed with the IRS to change a method of accounting under this paragraph (d)(2) should be labeled ``Filed under section 381(c)(4)'' at the top.
(ii) Final year limitation. Any scope limitation relating to the final year of a trade or business will not apply to a taxpayer that changes its method of accounting in the final year of a trade or business that is terminated as the result of a section 381(a) transaction.
(iii) Time to file. Under the authority of Sec. 1.446-1(e)(3)(ii), for a change in method of accounting requiring advance consent, the application for a change in method of accounting (for example, Form 3115) must be filed with the IRS on or before the later of--
(A) The due date for filing a Form 3115 as specified in Sec. 1.446-1(e), for example, the last day of the taxable year in which the distribution or transfer occurred, or
(B) The earlier of--
(1) The day that is 180 days after the date of distribution or transfer, or
(2) The day on which the acquiring corporation files its federal income tax return for the taxable year in which the distribution or transfer occurred.
(e) Rules and procedures--(1) No method of accounting. If a party to a section 381(a) transaction is not using a method of accounting, does not have a method of accounting for a particular item, or came into existence as a result of the transaction, the party will not be treated as having a method of accounting different from that used by another party to the section 381(a) transaction.
(1) No method of accounting. If a party to a section 381(a) transaction is not using a method of accounting, does not have a method of accounting for a particular item, or came into existence as a result of the transaction, the party will not be treated as having a method of accounting different from that used by another party to the section 381(a) transaction.
(2) Elections and adoptions allowed. If an election does not require the Commissioner's consent, an acquiring corporation or a distributor or transferor corporation is not precluded from making any election that is otherwise permissible for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. For purposes of this section, a corporation shall be deemed as having made any election as of the first day of the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. Similarly, where adoption is permissible, an acquiring corporation or a distributor or transferor corporation may adopt any permissible method of accounting for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer.
(3) Elections continue after section 381(a) transaction--(i) General rule. An acquiring corporation is not required to renew any election not otherwise requiring renewal and previously made by it or by a distributor or transferor corporation for a carryover method or a principal method if the acquiring corporation uses the method after the section 381(a) transaction. If the acquiring corporation uses a method after the date of distribution or transfer, an election made by the acquiring corporation or by a distributor or transferor corporation for that method that was in effect on the date of distribution or transfer continues after the section 381(a) transaction as though the distribution or transfer had not occurred.
(i) General rule. An acquiring corporation is not required to renew any election not otherwise requiring renewal and previously made by it or by a distributor or transferor corporation for a carryover method or a principal method if the acquiring corporation uses the method after the section 381(a) transaction. If the acquiring corporation uses a method after the date of distribution or transfer, an election made by the acquiring corporation or by a distributor or transferor corporation for that method that was in effect on the date of distribution or transfer continues after the section 381(a) transaction as though the distribution or transfer had not occurred.
(ii) Example. The following example illustrates the rules of this paragraph (e)(3):
Example. The acquiring corporation, X Corporation, previously elected to amortize bond premium under section 171. X Corporation acquires the assets of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. X Corporation determines under the rules of paragraph (c)(1) of this section that X Corporation's method of amortizing bond premium is the principal method. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation is not required to renew its bond premium amortization election and is bound by it. Additionally, X Corporation would not be required to renew its election to amortize bond premium if the method were the carryover method under paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
(4) Appropriate times for certain determinations--(i) Determining the method of accounting. The method of accounting used by a party to a section 381(a) transaction on the date of distribution or transfer is the method of accounting used by that party as of the end of the day that is immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer.
(i) Determining the method of accounting. The method of accounting used by a party to a section 381(a) transaction on the date of distribution or transfer is the method of accounting used by that party as of the end of the day that is immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer.
(ii) Determining whether there are separate and distinct trades or businesses after the date of distribution or transfer. Whether an acquiring corporation will operate the trades or businesses of the parties to a section 381(a) transaction as separate and distinct trades or businesses after the date of distribution or transfer will be determined as of the date of distribution or transfer based upon the facts and circumstances. Intent to combine books and records of the trades or businesses may be demonstrated by contemporaneous records and documents or by other objective evidence that reflects the acquiring corporation's ultimate plan of operation, even though the actual combination of the books and records may extend beyond the end of the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer.
(5) Representative period for aggregating gross receipts. The representative period for measuring gross receipts is generally the 12 consecutive months preceding the date of distribution or transfer. If a component trade or business was not in existence for the 12 consecutive months preceding the date of distribution or transfer, then all component trades or businesses of each integrated trade or business will compare their gross receipts for the period that such trade or business was in existence. For example, if the acquiring corporation's component trade or business was formed in August and the date of distribution or transfer occurred in December of the same year, the gross receipts for those five months will be compared with the gross receipts of the other component trades or businesses for the same period.
(6) Establishing a method of accounting. A method of accounting used by the distributor or transferor corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer that continues to be used by the acquiring corporation after the date of distribution or transfer is an established method of accounting for purposes of section 446(e), whether or not such method is proper or is permitted under the Internal Revenue Code or any applicable Income Tax Regulations.
(7) Other applicable provisions. This section does not preempt any other provision of the Internal Revenue Code or the Income Tax Regulations that is applicable to the acquiring corporation's circumstances. For example, income, deductions, credits, allowances, and exclusions may be allocated among the parties to a section 381(a) transaction and other taxpayers under sections 269 and 482, if appropriate. Similarly, transfers of contracts accounted for using a long-term contract method of accounting are governed by the rules provided in Sec. 1.460-4(k). Further, if other paragraphs of section 381(c) apply for purposes of determining the methods of accounting to be used following the date of distribution or transfer, section 381(c)(4) and this Sec. 1.381(c)(4)-1 will not apply to the tax treatment of the items. For example, this section does not apply to inventories that an acquiring corporation obtains in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. Instead, the rules of section 381(c)(5) govern the inventory method to be used by the acquiring corporation after the distribution or transfer. Similarly, if the acquiring corporation assumes an obligation of the distributor or transferor corporation that gives rise to a liability after the date of distribution or transfer and to which Sec. 1.381(c)(16)-1 applies, the deductibility of the item is determined under this section only after the rules of section 381(c)(16) are applied.
(8) Character of items of income and deduction. After the date of distribution or transfer, items of income and deduction have the same character in the hands of the acquiring corporation as they would have had in the hands of the distributor or transferor corporation if no distribution or transfer had occurred.
(9) Method of accounting selected by project or job. If other sections of the Internal Revenue Code, Income Tax Regulations, or other administrative guidance permit an acquiring corporation to elect a method of accounting on a project-by-project, job-by-job, or other similar basis, then for purposes of this section the method elected with respect to each project or job is the established method only for that project or job. For example, the election under section 460 to classify a contract to perform both manufacturing and construction activities as a long-term construction contract if at least 95 percent of the estimated total allocable contract costs are reasonably allocated to the construction activities is made on a contract-by-contract basis. Accordingly, the method of accounting previously elected for a project or job generally continues after the date of distribution or transfer. However, if the trades or businesses of the parties to a section 381(a) transaction are not operated as separate and distinct trades or businesses after the date of distribution or transfer, and two or more of the parties to the section 381(a) transaction previously worked on the same project or job and used different methods of accounting for the project or job immediately before the distribution or transfer, then the acquiring corporation must determine the principal method for that project or job under paragraph (c) of this section and make changes, if necessary, to the principal method in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
(10) Impermissible method of accounting. This section does not limit the Commissioner's ability under section 446(b) to determine whether a taxpayer's method of accounting is an impermissible method or otherwise fails to clearly reflect income. For example, an acquiring corporation may not use the method of accounting determined under paragraph (a)(2) of this section if the method fails to clearly reflect the acquiring corporation's income within the meaning of section 446(b).
(f) Effective/applicability date. This section applies to corporate reorganizations and tax-free liquidations described in section 381(a) that occur on or after August 31, 2011. [T.D. 9534, 76 FR 45675, Aug. 1, 2011] Sec. 1.381(c)(5)-1 Inventory method.
(a) Introduction--(1) Purpose. This section provides guidance regarding the inventory method an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(5) apply and how to implement any associated change in method of accounting. See Sec. 1.381(c)(4)-1 for guidance regarding the method of accounting or combination of methods (other than inventory and depreciation methods) an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(4) apply. See Sec. 1.381(c)(6)-1 for guidance regarding the depreciation method an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(6) apply.
(1) Purpose. This section provides guidance regarding the inventory method an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(5) apply and how to implement any associated change in method of accounting. See Sec. 1.381(c)(4)-1 for guidance regarding the method of accounting or combination of methods (other than inventory and depreciation methods) an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(4) apply. See Sec. 1.381(c)(6)-1 for guidance regarding the depreciation method an acquiring corporation must use following a distribution or transfer to which sections 381(a) and 381(c)(6) apply.
(2) Carryover method requirement for separate and distinct trades or businesses. In a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, if an acquiring corporation continues to operate a trade or business of the parties to the section 381(a) transaction as a separate and distinct trade or business after the date of distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation must use a carryover method as defined in paragraph (b)(4) of this section for each continuing trade or business, unless either the carryover method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or the acquiring corporation changes the carryover method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. The acquiring corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to continue a carryover method.
(3) Principal method requirement for trades or businesses not operated as separate and distinct trades or businesses. In a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, if an acquiring corporation does not operate the trades or businesses of the parties to the section 381(a) transaction as separate and distinct trades or businesses after the date of distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation must use a principal method determined under paragraph (c) of this section, unless either the principal method is impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or the acquiring corporation changes the principal method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. The acquiring corporation must change to a principal method in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section for each integrated trade or business and need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use a principal method.
(4) Carryover method or principal method not a permissible method. If a carryover method or principal method is not a permissible inventory method, the acquiring corporation must secure the Commissioner's consent to change to a permissible inventory method as provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section. If the acquiring corporation must use a single inventory method for a particular type of goods after the date of distribution or transfer regardless of the number of separate and distinct trades or businesses operated on that date, the acquiring corporation must use the principal method for that type of goods as determined under paragraph (c) of this section, unless either the principal method is impermissible and must be changed under this paragraph (a)(4) or the acquiring corporation changes the principal method in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section.
(5) Voluntary change. Any party to a section 381(a) transaction may request permission under section 446(e) to change an inventory method for the taxable year in which the transaction occurs or is expected to occur. For trades or businesses that will not operate as separate and distinct trades or businesses after the date of distribution or transfer, a change in method of accounting for the taxable year that includes that date will be granted only if the requested inventory method is the method that the acquiring corporation must use after the date of distribution or transfer. The time and manner of obtaining the Commissioner's consent to change to a different inventory method is described in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(6) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (a). Unless otherwise noted, the carryover method is a permissible inventory method.
(i) Facts. X Corporation manufactures radios and television sets. X Corporation uses the first-in, first-out (FIFO) method of inventory identification, the cost method of valuing its inventories, and capitalizes inventory costs in accordance with section 263A. T Corporation manufactures washing machines and dryers. T Corporation uses the last-in, first-out (LIFO) method of inventory identification, the cost method of valuing its inventories, and capitalizes inventory costs under section 263A using methods other than those used by X Corporation. X Corporation acquires the inventory of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation operates its radio and television manufacturing business as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from its washing machines and dryers manufacturing business.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation operates its manufacturing businesses as separate and distinct trades or businesses, under paragraph (a)(2) of this section X Corporation must use the carryover methods for each continuing trade or business, unless either the carryover methods are impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the carryover methods in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. As defined in paragraph (b)(4) of this section, the carryover methods for the radios and television sets manufacturing business are the FIFO method, the cost basis of valuation, and X Corporation's methods of accounting for section 263A costs immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. The carryover methods for the washing machines and dryers manufacturing business are the LIFO method, the cost basis of valuation, and T Corporation's methods of accounting for section 263A costs immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. There is no change in method of accounting, and X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use any carryover method.
(i) Facts. X Corporation manufactures food and beverages and uses the FIFO method of inventory identification, the cost method of valuing its inventories, and capitalizes costs in accordance with section 263A. T Corporation sells sporting equipment. T Corporation uses the FIFO method of inventory identification and the cost method of valuing its inventories. T Corporation does not capitalize costs under section 263A because it meets the small reseller exception under section 263A. X Corporation acquires the inventory of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation operates the food and beverages business as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from the sporting equipment business, and X Corporation does not qualify for the small reseller exception under section 263A for its sporting equipment business.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation operates the food and beverages business as a separate and distinct trade or business, under paragraph (a)(2) of this section X Corporation must use the carryover methods for each continuing trade or business, unless either the carryover methods are impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the carryover methods in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. As defined in paragraph (b)(4) of this section, the carryover methods for the food and beverages business are the FIFO method, the cost basis of valuation, and X Corporation's methods of capitalizing costs under section 263A immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. The carryover methods for the sporting equipment business are the FIFO method and the cost basis of valuation. There is no change in method of accounting, and X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use any carryover method. However, because X Corporation does not qualify for the small reseller exception under section 263A for its sporting equipment business, X Corporation's method of not capitalizing additional section 263A costs is an impermissible carryover method under paragraph (a)(4) of this section. X Corporation must secure the Commissioner's consent to change to a permissible method of capitalizing costs under section 263A for the sporting equipment business as provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(b) Definitions. For purposes of this section--
(1) Inventory method. An inventory method is a method of accounting used to account for merchandise on hand (including finished goods, work in process, and raw materials) at the beginning of a year for purposes of computing taxable income for that year. The term includes not only the method for identifying inventory, for example, the FIFO inventory method or the LIFO inventory method, but also all other methods necessary to account for merchandise.
(2) Adoption of a method of accounting. Adoption of a method of accounting has the same meaning as provided in Sec. 1.446-1(e)(1).
(3) Change in method of accounting. A change in method of accounting has the same meaning as provided in Sec. 1.446-1(e)(2).
(4) Carryover method. A carryover method is an inventory method that each party to a section 381(a) transaction uses for each separate and distinct trade or business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer.
(5) Principal method. A principal method is an inventory method that is determined under paragraph (c) of this section.
(6) Permissible method of accounting. A permissible method of accounting is a method of accounting that is proper or permitted under the Internal Revenue Code or any applicable Income Tax Regulations.
(7) Acquiring corporation. An acquiring corporation has the same meaning as provided in Sec. 1.381(a)-1(b)(2).
(8) Distributor corporation. A distributor corporation means the corporation, foreign or domestic, that distributes its assets to another corporation described in section 332(b) in a distribution to which section 332 (relating to liquidations of subsidiaries) applies.
(9) Transferor corporation. A transferor corporation means the corporation, foreign or domestic, that transfers its assets to another corporation in a transfer to which section 361 (relating to nonrecognition of gain or loss to corporations) applies, but only if--
(i) The transfer is in connection with a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(A), (a)(1)(C), or (a)(1)(F), or
(ii) The transfer is in connection with a reorganization described in section 368(a)(1)(D) or (a)(1)(G), provided the requirements of section 354(b) are met.
(10) Parties to the section 381(a) transaction. Parties to the section 381(a) transaction means the acquiring corporation and the distributor or transferor corporation that participate in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies.
(11) Date of distribution or transfer. The date of distribution or transfer has the same meaning as provided in section 381(b)(2) and Sec. 1.381(b)-1(b).
(12) Separate and distinct trades or businesses. Separate and distinct trades or businesses has the same meaning as provided in Sec. 1.446-1(d).
(13) Audit protection. Audit protection means, for purposes of paragraph (d)(1) of this section, that the IRS will not require an acquiring corporation that is required to change a method of accounting under paragraph (a)(3) of this section to change that method for a taxable year ending prior to the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer.
(14) Section 481(a) adjustment. The section 481(a) adjustment means an adjustment that must be taken into account as required under section 481(a) to prevent amounts from being duplicated or omitted when the taxable income of an acquiring corporation is computed under a method of accounting different from the method used to compute taxable income for the preceding taxable year.
(15) Cut-off basis. A cut-off basis means a manner in which a change in method of accounting is made without a section 481(a) adjustment and under which only the items arising after the beginning of the year of change (or, in the case of a change made under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, after the date of distribution or transfer) are accounted for under the new method of accounting. When it implements the change on a cut-off basis, a taxpayer using the LIFO inventory method to identify its inventory goods that makes a change in method of accounting within the LIFO inventory method from one LIFO method or sub-method to another LIFO method or sub-method uses the new LIFO inventory method to determine its current-year cost and base-year cost of ending inventories for the year of change, but does not recompute the cost of beginning inventories for the year of change using the new LIFO inventory method.
(16) Adjustment period. The adjustment period means the number of taxable years for taking into account the section 481(a) adjustment required as a result of a change in method of accounting.
(17) Component trade or business. A component trade or business is a trade or business of a party to the section 381(a) transaction that will be combined and integrated with a trade or business of the other party to the section 381 transaction. See paragraph (e)(7)(ii) of this section for the determination of whether a trade or business is operated as a separate and distinct trade or business after the date of distribution or transfer.
(c) Principal method--(1) In general. For each integrated trade or business, the principal method for a particular type of goods is generally the inventory method used by the component trade or business of the acquiring corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer for that type of goods. If, however, on the date of distribution or transfer the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation holds more inventory of a type of goods than the component trade or business of the acquiring corporation, the principal method for such goods is the inventory method used by the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation immediately prior to that date. For each integrated trade or business, the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation holds more inventory if, for a particular type of goods, the aggregate of the fair market value of the goods held by each component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation exceeds the aggregate of the fair market value of the goods held by each component trade or business of the acquiring corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. Alternatively, as a simplifying convention, the acquiring corporation may elect to apply the preceding sentence to the aggregate fair market value of the entire inventories, held by each component trade or business of the acquiring corporation and each component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation, that will be integrated after the date of distribution or transfer. If the component trade or business with the larger aggregate fair market value of the entire inventories does not have an inventory method for a particular type of goods immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer, the principal method for that type of goods is the inventory method used by the component trade or business that does have an inventory method for that type of goods.
(1) In general. For each integrated trade or business, the principal method for a particular type of goods is generally the inventory method used by the component trade or business of the acquiring corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer for that type of goods. If, however, on the date of distribution or transfer the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation holds more inventory of a type of goods than the component trade or business of the acquiring corporation, the principal method for such goods is the inventory method used by the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation immediately prior to that date. For each integrated trade or business, the component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation holds more inventory if, for a particular type of goods, the aggregate of the fair market value of the goods held by each component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation exceeds the aggregate of the fair market value of the goods held by each component trade or business of the acquiring corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. Alternatively, as a simplifying convention, the acquiring corporation may elect to apply the preceding sentence to the aggregate fair market value of the entire inventories, held by each component trade or business of the acquiring corporation and each component trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation, that will be integrated after the date of distribution or transfer. If the component trade or business with the larger aggregate fair market value of the entire inventories does not have an inventory method for a particular type of goods immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer, the principal method for that type of goods is the inventory method used by the component trade or business that does have an inventory method for that type of goods.
(2) Multiple component trades or businesses with different principal methods. If a party to the section 381(a) transaction has multiple component trades or businesses and more than one principal inventory method for a particular type of goods, then the acquiring corporation may choose which of the inventory methods used by such component trades or businesses will be the principal method of the integrated trade or business. The acquiring corporation must choose a principal method that is a permissible method of accounting. In general, a change to a principal method in a transaction to which section 381(a) and paragraph (a)(3) of this section apply is made under paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
(3) Examples. The following examples illustrate the rules of this paragraph (c). Unless otherwise noted, the principal method is a permissible inventory method.
(i) Facts. X Corporation and T Corporation each manufacture tennis equipment. X Corporation's manufacturing business uses the FIFO method of inventory identification, the cost method of valuing inventories, and allocates indirect costs to the property produced using the burden rate method provided in Sec. 1.263A-1(f)(3)(i). T Corporation's manufacturing business uses the LIFO method of inventory identification, the cost method of valuing its inventories, and allocates indirect costs to the property it produces using the standard cost method provided in Sec. 1.263A-1(f)(3)(ii). X Corporation acquires the inventory of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. The fair market value of each particular type of goods held by X Corporation's manufacturing business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer exceeds the fair market value of each particular type of goods held by T Corporation's manufacturing business on that date. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation will not operate its manufacturing business as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from T Corporation's manufacturing business.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation will not operate its manufacturing business as a separate and distinct trade or business, X Corporation must use the principal methods under paragraph (a)(3) of this section, unless either the principal methods are impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the principal methods in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. The fair market value of each particular type of goods held by T Corporation's manufacturing business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer does not exceed the fair market value of each particular type of goods held by X Corporation's manufacturing business on that date. Because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation's manufacturing business does not hold more inventory than X Corporation's manufacturing business, the principal methods are the FIFO method of inventory identification, the cost method of valuation, and X Corporation's method of allocating indirect costs under section 263A using the burden rate method. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use these methods. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the inventory methods for the manufacturing business acquired from T Corporation to the principal methods.
(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example (1), except that the fair market value of each particular type of goods held by X Corporation's manufacturing business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer is identical to the fair market value of each particular type of goods held by T Corporation's manufacturing business on that date.
(ii) Conclusion. The result is the same as in Example (1). The principal methods are the FIFO method of inventory identification, the cost method of valuation, and X Corporation's method of allocating indirect costs under section 263A using the burden rate method. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal methods. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the inventory methods for the manufacturing business acquired from T Corporation to the principal methods.
(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example (1), except that the fair market value of each particular type of goods held by T Corporation's manufacturing business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer exceeds the fair market value of each particular type of goods held by X Corporation's manufacturing business on that date.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation will not operate its manufacturing business as a separate and distinct trade or business, X Corporation must use the principal methods under paragraph (a)(3) of this section, unless either the principal methods are impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the principal methods in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. The fair market value of each particular type of goods held by T Corporation's manufacturing business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer exceeds the fair market value of each particular type of goods held by X Corporation's manufacturing business on that date. Because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation's manufacturing business holds more inventory than X Corporation's manufacturing business, the principal methods are the LIFO method of inventory identification, the cost method of valuation, and T Corporation's method of allocating indirect costs under section 263A using the standard cost method. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal methods. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the inventory methods for the manufacturing business operated by X Corporation prior to the date of distribution or transfer to the principal methods.
(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example (1), except that T Corporation wants to discontinue using the LIFO method for its manufacturing business and change to the FIFO method for the taxable year in which the section 381(a) transaction occurs or is expected to occur.
(ii) Conclusion. Under paragraph (a)(5) of this section, the Commissioner will grant a request to change a method of accounting for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer only if the requested method is the method that the acquiring corporation must use after the date of distribution or transfer. The Commissioner will consent to a request by T Corporation to change to the FIFO method for the taxable year in which the section 381(a) transaction occurs or is expected to occur because X Corporation will use this method after the date of distribution or transfer.
(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example (1), except that T Corporation's manufacturing business has a particular type of goods that is not held by X Corporation's manufacturing business.
(ii) Conclusion. The result is similar to Example (1). In general, the principal methods are the FIFO method of inventory identification, the cost method of valuation, and X Corporation's method of allocating indirect costs to the property produced using the burden rate method. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal methods. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the inventory methods for the manufacturing business acquired from T Corporation to the principal methods. Under paragraph (c) of this section, the principal methods for the particular type of goods held only by T Corporation's manufacturing business are the LIFO method of inventory identification, the cost method of valuation, and T Corporation's method of allocating indirect costs to the property it produces using the standard cost method. X Corporation must determine whether the principal methods for the type of goods previously held by T Corporation are permissible given that such methods are different than the principal methods that must be used by X for all other goods. If X Corporation's use of the standard cost method would be impermissible after the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation must change to a permissible method under section 263A for those goods in accordance with paragraph (a)(4) of this section.
(i) Facts. X Corporation manufactures planes and T Corporation manufactures planes and communications satellites. X Corporation's manufacturing business uses the FIFO method of inventory identification and values its inventories at cost or market, whichever is lower, while T Corporation's manufacturing business uses the LIFO method of inventory identification and values its inventories at cost. X Corporation's manufacturing business and T Corporation's manufacturing business use the same methods to capitalize costs under section 263A. X Corporation acquires the inventory of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. In lieu of determining the fair market value of each particular type of goods held on the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation elects to value the entire inventories of its manufacturing business and the entire inventories of T Corporation's manufacturing business in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section. The fair market value of the inventory held by T Corporation's manufacturing business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer does not exceed the fair market value of the inventory held by X Corporation's manufacturing business on that date. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation will not operate its manufacturing business as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from T Corporation's manufacturing business.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation will not operate its manufacturing business as a separate and distinct trade or business, X Corporation must use the principal methods under paragraph (a)(3) of this section, unless either the principal methods are impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the principal methods in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. The fair market value of the entire inventory held by T Corporation's manufacturing business immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer does not exceed the fair market value of the entire inventory of X Corporation's manufacturing business on that date. Because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation's manufacturing business does not hold more inventory than X Corporation's manufacturing business, the principal methods are the FIFO method, the cost or market, whichever is lower, method of valuation, and X Corporation's method of capitalizing costs under section 263A on the date of distribution or transfer. X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal methods. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the inventory methods for the manufacturing business acquired from T Corporation to the principal methods.
(i) Facts. X Corporation manufactures tennis equipment in a trade or business that is separate and distinct from its trade or business of manufacturing golf equipment. X Corporation uses the FIFO method of inventory identification for its tennis equipment and the LIFO method of inventory identification for its golf equipment. X Corporation values the goods in both inventories at cost and allocates indirect costs to the property produced using the burden rate method provided in Sec. 1.263A-1(f)(3)(i). T Corporation manufactures tennis equipment. T Corporation's manufacturing business uses the FIFO method of inventory identification, values inventories at cost, and allocates indirect costs to the property it produces using the standard cost method provided in Sec. 1.263A-1(f)(3)(ii). X Corporation acquires the inventory of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. Immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer, the fair market value of T Corporation's inventories in the tennis equipment manufacturing business exceeds the fair market value of the inventories held by X Corporation's tennis equipment manufacturing business. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation will not operate its tennis equipment manufacturing business as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from T Corporation's tennis equipment manufacturing business, but X Corporation will operate its golf equipment manufacturing business as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from the tennis equipment manufacturing business.
(ii) Conclusion. Because after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation will not operate its tennis equipment manufacturing business as a separate and distinct trade or business, X Corporation must use the principal methods under paragraph (a)(3) of this section, unless either the principal methods are impermissible and must be changed under paragraph (a)(4) of this section or X Corporation changes the principal methods in accordance with paragraph (a)(5) of this section. Under paragraph (c)(1) of this section, X Corporation elects to compare the fair market values of the entire inventories of the component trades or businesses on the date of distribution or transfer to determine whether T Corporation holds more inventory than X Corporation. The fair market value of the inventory held by T Corporation's tennis equipment manufacturing business exceeds the fair market value of the tennis equipment held by X Corporation's tennis equipment manufacturing business. Because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation's tennis equipment manufacturing business holds more inventory than X Corporation's tennis equipment manufacturing business, the principal methods for the combined tennis equipment business are the FIFO method of inventory identification, the cost basis of valuation, and T Corporation's methods of allocating indirect costs under section 263A using the standard cost method provided in Sec. 1.263A-1(f)(3)(ii). X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use the principal methods. However, in accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the methods of accounting for its tennis equipment manufacturing business to the principal methods. Under paragraph (a)(2) of this section, because X Corporation will operate the golf equipment manufacturing business as a separate trade or business, for the inventories held by the golf equipment manufacturing business X Corporation must continue to use the LIFO method of inventory identification, use the cost basis of valuation, and allocate indirect costs under section 263A using the burden rate method provided in Sec. 1.263A-1(f)(3)(i). There are no changes in method of accounting for the golf manufacturing business, and X Corporation need not secure the Commissioner's consent to use these carryover methods.
(i) Facts. The facts are the same as in Example (7), except that after the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation will not operate the golf equipment manufacturing business as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from the tennis equipment manufacturing business. In addition, the fair market value of the inventories of X Corporation's tennis equipment manufacturing business and golf equipment manufacturing business, in the aggregate, exceed the fair market value of the inventories of T Corporation's tennis equipment manufacturing business.
(ii) Conclusion. Because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation's tennis equipment manufacturing business does not hold more inventory than X Corporation's tennis equipment manufacturing business and golf equipment manufacturing business, in the aggregate, the principal method for identifying inventory is the method used by X Corporation's component trade or business on the date of distribution or transfer. However, because on the date of distribution or transfer X Corporation operates two separate and distinct trades or businesses with different inventory identification methods that will be combined after the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation may choose under paragraph (c)(2) of this section which method used by its component trades or businesses will be the principal method. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation may use either the FIFO method of inventory identification used by the tennis equipment manufacturing business or the LIFO method of inventory identification used by the golf equipment manufacturing business as the principal method of identification, if either method is a permissible method. For the integrated trade or business, X Corporation will use the cost method of valuation and allocate indirect costs under section 263A using the burden rate method provided in Sec. 1.263A-1(f)(3)(i). In accordance with paragraph (d)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the inventory methods of T Corporation's manufacturing business to the principal methods. Under paragraph (a)(3) of this section, X Corporation also must change either its golf equipment manufacturing business or its tennis equipment manufacturing business, depending on which principal method X Corporation selects, to the principal method.
(d) Procedures for changing a method of accounting--(1) Change made to principal method under paragraph (a)(3) of this section--(i) Section 481(a) adjustment--(A) In general. An acquiring corporation that changes its method of accounting or the distributor or transferor corporation's method of accounting under paragraph (a)(3) of this section does not need to secure the Commissioner's consent to use a principal method. To the extent the use of a principal method constitutes a change in method of accounting, the change in method is treated as a change initiated by the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 481(a)(2). Any change to a principal method, whether the change relates to a trade or business of the acquiring corporation or a trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation, must be reflected on the acquiring corporation's federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. The amount of the section 481(a) adjustment and the adjustment period, if any, necessary to implement a change to the principal method are determined under Sec. 1.446-1(e) and the applicable administrative procedures that govern voluntary changes in methods of accounting under section 446(e). If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require that a method of accounting be implemented on a cut-off basis, the acquiring corporation must implement the change, on a cut-off basis as of the date of distribution or transfer, on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require a section 481(a) adjustment, the acquiring corporation must determine the section 481(a) adjustment and include the appropriate amount of the section 481(a) adjustment on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer and subsequent taxable year(s), as necessary. This adjustment is determined by the acquiring corporation as of the beginning of the day that is immediately after the date of distribution or transfer.
(1) Change made to principal method under paragraph (a)(3) of this section--(i) Section 481(a) adjustment--(A) In general. An acquiring corporation that changes its method of accounting or the distributor or transferor corporation's method of accounting under paragraph (a)(3) of this section does not need to secure the Commissioner's consent to use a principal method. To the extent the use of a principal method constitutes a change in method of accounting, the change in method is treated as a change initiated by the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 481(a)(2). Any change to a principal method, whether the change relates to a trade or business of the acquiring corporation or a trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation, must be reflected on the acquiring corporation's federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. The amount of the section 481(a) adjustment and the adjustment period, if any, necessary to implement a change to the principal method are determined under Sec. 1.446-1(e) and the applicable administrative procedures that govern voluntary changes in methods of accounting under section 446(e). If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require that a method of accounting be implemented on a cut-off basis, the acquiring corporation must implement the change, on a cut-off basis as of the date of distribution or transfer, on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require a section 481(a) adjustment, the acquiring corporation must determine the section 481(a) adjustment and include the appropriate amount of the section 481(a) adjustment on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer and subsequent taxable year(s), as necessary. This adjustment is determined by the acquiring corporation as of the beginning of the day that is immediately after the date of distribution or transfer.
(i) Section 481(a) adjustment--(A) In general. An acquiring corporation that changes its method of accounting or the distributor or transferor corporation's method of accounting under paragraph (a)(3) of this section does not need to secure the Commissioner's consent to use a principal method. To the extent the use of a principal method constitutes a change in method of accounting, the change in method is treated as a change initiated by the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 481(a)(2). Any change to a principal method, whether the change relates to a trade or business of the acquiring corporation or a trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation, must be reflected on the acquiring corporation's federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. The amount of the section 481(a) adjustment and the adjustment period, if any, necessary to implement a change to the principal method are determined under Sec. 1.446-1(e) and the applicable administrative procedures that govern voluntary changes in methods of accounting under section 446(e). If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require that a method of accounting be implemented on a cut-off basis, the acquiring corporation must implement the change, on a cut-off basis as of the date of distribution or transfer, on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require a section 481(a) adjustment, the acquiring corporation must determine the section 481(a) adjustment and include the appropriate amount of the section 481(a) adjustment on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer and subsequent taxable year(s), as necessary. This adjustment is determined by the acquiring corporation as of the beginning of the day that is immediately after the date of distribution or transfer.
(A) In general. An acquiring corporation that changes its method of accounting or the distributor or transferor corporation's method of accounting under paragraph (a)(3) of this section does not need to secure the Commissioner's consent to use a principal method. To the extent the use of a principal method constitutes a change in method of accounting, the change in method is treated as a change initiated by the acquiring corporation for purposes of section 481(a)(2). Any change to a principal method, whether the change relates to a trade or business of the acquiring corporation or a trade or business of the distributor or transferor corporation, must be reflected on the acquiring corporation's federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. The amount of the section 481(a) adjustment and the adjustment period, if any, necessary to implement a change to the principal method are determined under Sec. 1.446-1(e) and the applicable administrative procedures that govern voluntary changes in methods of accounting under section 446(e). If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require that a method of accounting be implemented on a cut-off basis, the acquiring corporation must implement the change, on a cut-off basis as of the date of distribution or transfer, on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. If the Internal Revenue Code, the Income Tax Regulations, or administrative procedures require a section 481(a) adjustment, the acquiring corporation must determine the section 481(a) adjustment and include the appropriate amount of the section 481(a) adjustment on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer and subsequent taxable year(s), as necessary. This adjustment is determined by the acquiring corporation as of the beginning of the day that is immediately after the date of distribution or transfer.
(B) Example. The following example illustrates the rules of this paragraph (d)(1)(i):
Example. X Corporation uses the FIFO method of inventory identification, and T Corporation uses the LIFO method of inventory identification. X Corporation acquires the inventory of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. X Corporation determines that under the rules of paragraph (c)(1) of this section, X Corporation must change the inventory method for the business acquired from T Corporation to the FIFO method. X Corporation will determine the section 481(a) adjustment pertaining to the change to the FIFO method (whether the amounts thereof represent increases or decreases in income) as of the beginning of the day that immediately follows the day on which X Corporation acquires the inventory of T Corporation. X Corporation will reflect this adjustment, or an appropriate part thereof, on its federal income tax return for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer.
(ii) Audit protection. Notwithstanding any other provision in any other Income Tax Regulation or administrative procedure, no audit protection is provided for any change in method of accounting under paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
(iii) Other terms and conditions. Except as otherwise provided in this section, other terms and conditions provided in Sec. 1.446-1(e) and the applicable administrative procedures for voluntary changes in method of accounting under section 446(e) apply to a change in method of accounting under this section. Thus, for example, if the administrative procedures for a particular change in method of accounting have a term and condition that provides for the acceleration of the section 481(a) adjustment period, this term and condition applies to a change made under this paragraph (d)(1). However, any scope limitation in the applicable administrative procedures will not apply for purposes of making a change under this paragraph (d)(1). For example, if the administrative procedures provide as a limitation that an identical change in method of accounting is barred for a period of years, this limitation will not bar a change to the principal method made under this section.
(2) Change made to a method of accounting under paragraph (a)(4) or (a)(5) of this section--(i) In general. A party to a section 381(a) transaction that changes a method of accounting under either paragraph (a)(4) or paragraph (a)(5) of this section must follow the provisions of Sec. 1.446-(1)(e) and the applicable administrative procedures, including scope limitations, for voluntary changes in method of accounting under section 446(e), except as provided in paragraphs (d)(2)(ii) and (d)(2)(iii) of this section. An application on Form 3115, ``Application for Change in Accounting Method,'' filed with the IRS to change a method of accounting under this paragraph (d)(2) should be labeled ``Filed under section 381(c)(5)'' at the top.
(i) In general. A party to a section 381(a) transaction that changes a method of accounting under either paragraph (a)(4) or paragraph (a)(5) of this section must follow the provisions of Sec. 1.446-(1)(e) and the applicable administrative procedures, including scope limitations, for voluntary changes in method of accounting under section 446(e), except as provided in paragraphs (d)(2)(ii) and (d)(2)(iii) of this section. An application on Form 3115, ``Application for Change in Accounting Method,'' filed with the IRS to change a method of accounting under this paragraph (d)(2) should be labeled ``Filed under section 381(c)(5)'' at the top.
(ii) Final year limitation. Any scope limitation relating to the final year of a trade or business will not apply to a taxpayer that changes its method of accounting in the final year of a trade or business that is terminated as the result of a section 381(a) transaction.
(iii) Time to file. Under the authority of Sec. 1.446-1(e)(3)(ii), for a change in method of accounting requiring advance consent, the application for a change in method of accounting (for example, Form 3115), must be filed with the IRS on or before the later of--
(A) The due date for filing a Form 3115 as specified in Sec. 1.446-1(e), for example, the last day of the taxable year in which the distribution or transfer occurred, or
(B) The earlier of--
(1) The day that is 180 days after the date of distribution or transfer, or
(2) The day on which the acquiring corporation files its federal income tax return for the taxable year in which the distribution or transfer occurred.
(e) Rules and procedures--(1) Inventory method selected for a particular type of goods. If other sections of the Internal Revenue Code or Income Tax Regulations allow a taxpayer to elect an inventory method for a particular type of goods, the method elected with respect to those goods is the established inventory method only for those goods. For example, an election to use the LIFO inventory method to identify specified goods in inventory, such as certain products in finished goods, is the inventory method only for those products.
(1) Inventory method selected for a particular type of goods. If other sections of the Internal Revenue Code or Income Tax Regulations allow a taxpayer to elect an inventory method for a particular type of goods, the method elected with respect to those goods is the established inventory method only for those goods. For example, an election to use the LIFO inventory method to identify specified goods in inventory, such as certain products in finished goods, is the inventory method only for those products.
(2) No method of accounting. If a party to a section 381(a) transaction is not using an inventory method, does not have an inventory method for a particular type of goods, or came into existence as a result of the transaction, the party will not be treated as having an inventory method different from that used by another party to the section 381(a) transaction.
(3) Elections and adoptions allowed. If an election does not require the Commissioner's consent, an acquiring corporation or a distributor or transferor corporation is not precluded from making any election that is otherwise permissible for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. For example, an acquiring corporation may elect to identify its inventory using the LIFO inventory method in the year of the distribution or transfer. For purposes of this section, a corporation shall be deemed as having made any election as of the first day of the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer. Similarly, where adoption is permissible, an acquiring corporation or a distributor or transferor corporation may adopt any permissible method of accounting for the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer.
(4) Elections continue after section 381(a) transaction--(i) General rule. An acquiring corporation is not required to renew any election not requiring renewal and previously made by it or by a distributor or transferor corporation for a carryover method or a principal method if the acquiring corporation uses the method after the section 381(a) transaction. If the acquiring corporation uses a method after the date of distribution or transfer, an election made by the acquiring corporation or by a distributor or transferor corporation for that method that was in effect on the date of distribution or transfer continues after the section 381(a) transaction as though the distribution or transfer had not occurred.
(i) General rule. An acquiring corporation is not required to renew any election not requiring renewal and previously made by it or by a distributor or transferor corporation for a carryover method or a principal method if the acquiring corporation uses the method after the section 381(a) transaction. If the acquiring corporation uses a method after the date of distribution or transfer, an election made by the acquiring corporation or by a distributor or transferor corporation for that method that was in effect on the date of distribution or transfer continues after the section 381(a) transaction as though the distribution or transfer had not occurred.
(ii) Example. The following example illustrates the rules of paragraph (e)(4):
Example. Since its incorporation in 1982, X Corporation elected to use the LIFO inventory method under section 472 to identify its inventory of tennis balls. Since its incorporation in 2002, T Corporation elected to use the FIFO inventory method to identify its inventory of tennis balls. X Corporation acquires the assets of T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. Immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer, the fair market value of X Corporation's inventory in its tennis balls exceeds the fair market value of the tennis balls inventory held by T Corporation. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation will not operate its business as a trade or business that is separate and distinct from T Corporation's business. Because on the date of distribution or transfer T Corporation does not hold more inventory than X Corporation, the principal method for identifying inventory is the method used by X Corporation on the date of distribution or transfer. After the date of distribution or transfer, X Corporation need not renew its election to identify inventory using the LIFO inventory method, and X Corporation is bound by the election.
(5) Adopting the LIFO inventory method. A party to a section 381(a) transaction will be deemed to be using the LIFO inventory method for a particular type of goods on the date of distribution or transfer if that party elects under section 472 to adopt that inventory method with respect to those goods for its taxable year within which the date of distribution or transfer occurs. See section 472 for the requirements to adopt the LIFO inventory method.
(6) Inventory layers treatment--(i) Adjustments required after a section 381(a) transaction. An acquiring corporation that determines the principal method of taking an inventory after a section 381(a) transaction under paragraphs (a)(3) and (c) of this section after the date of distribution or transfer may need to integrate inventories and make appropriate adjustments as provided in paragraphs (e)(6)(ii) and (e)(6)(iii) of this section.
(i) Adjustments required after a section 381(a) transaction. An acquiring corporation that determines the principal method of taking an inventory after a section 381(a) transaction under paragraphs (a)(3) and (c) of this section after the date of distribution or transfer may need to integrate inventories and make appropriate adjustments as provided in paragraphs (e)(6)(ii) and (e)(6)(iii) of this section.
(ii) LIFO inventory method used after the section 381(a) transaction--(A) LIFO inventory method used by the acquiring corporation and the distributor or transferor corporation--(1) Principal method is the dollar-value LIFO method. If, under paragraphs (a)(3) and (c) of this section, the acquiring corporation changes its inventory method or the inventory method of the distributor or transferor corporation from the specific goods LIFO method of pricing inventories to the dollar-value LIFO method of pricing inventories (dollar-value LIFO method) for a particular type of goods, the inventory accounted for under the specific goods method shall be placed on the dollar-value method as provided in Sec. 1.472-8(f), and then the inventory shall be integrated with the inventory previously accounted for under the dollar-value LIFO method. If pools of each corporation are permitted or required to be combined, the pools must be combined as provided in Sec. 1.472-8(g)(2). For purposes of combining pools, all base year inventories or layers of increment that occur in taxable years including the same December 31 shall be combined. A base year inventory or layer of increment occurring in any short taxable year of a distributor or transferor corporation shall be merged with and considered a layer of increment of its immediately preceding taxable year.
(2) Principal method is the specific goods LIFO method. If, under paragraphs (a)(3) and (c) of this section, the acquiring corporation changes its inventory method or the inventory method of the distributor or transferor corporation from the dollar-value LIFO method of pricing inventories to the specific goods LIFO method of pricing inventories, the acquiring corporation shall treat the inventory being changed to the specific goods LIFO method as having the same acquisition dates and costs as such inventory had under the dollar-value LIFO method.
(B) Change from the FIFO inventory method to either the specific goods LIFO method or the dollar-value LIFO method. If, under paragraphs (a)(3) and (c) of this section, the acquiring corporation changes its inventory method or the inventory method of the distributor or transferor corporation from the FIFO inventory method to either the specific goods LIFO method or the dollar-value method of pricing LIFO inventories, the inventory accounted for under the FIFO inventory method shall be treated by the acquiring corporation as having been acquired at their average unit cost in a single transaction on the date of the distribution or transfer. Thus, if an inventory of a particular type of goods is combined in an existing dollar-value pool, the goods shall be treated as if they were purchased by the acquiring corporation at the average unit cost on the date of the distribution or transfer with respect to such pool. Alternatively, if the goods are not combined in an existing pool, the goods will be treated as if they were purchased by the acquiring corporation at the average unit cost on the date of the distribution or transfer with respect to a new pool, with the base-year being the year of the section 381(a) transaction. Adjustments resulting from a restoration to cost of any write-down to market value of the inventories shall be taken into account by the acquiring corporation ratably in each of the three taxable years beginning with the taxable year that includes the date of the distribution or transfer. See section 472(d).
(iii) FIFO inventory method used after the section 381(a) transaction--(A) FIFO inventory method used by the acquiring corporation and the distributor or transferor corporation. If, under paragraphs (a)(3) and (c) of this section, the FIFO inventory method is the principal method and the component trades or businesses of both the acquiring corporation and the distributor or transferor corporation use the FIFO method immediately prior to the distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation must treat the inventory that must change to the principal method as having the same acquisition dates and costs as such inventory had immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. However, if the principal method of valuing inventories is the cost or market, whichever is lower, method, the acquiring corporation must treat the inventories that must change to the principal method as having been acquired at cost or market, whichever is lower.
(A) FIFO inventory method used by the acquiring corporation and the distributor or transferor corporation. If, under paragraphs (a)(3) and (c) of this section, the FIFO inventory method is the principal method and the component trades or businesses of both the acquiring corporation and the distributor or transferor corporation use the FIFO method immediately prior to the distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation must treat the inventory that must change to the principal method as having the same acquisition dates and costs as such inventory had immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer. However, if the principal method of valuing inventories is the cost or market, whichever is lower, method, the acquiring corporation must treat the inventories that must change to the principal method as having been acquired at cost or market, whichever is lower.
(B) Change from either the specific goods LIFO method or the dollar-value LIFO method to the FIFO inventory method. If, under paragraphs (a)(3) and (c) of this section, the acquiring corporation changes its inventory method or the inventory method of the distributor or transferor corporation from either the specific goods LIFO method or the dollar-value LIFO method to the FIFO inventory method, the acquiring corporation must treat the inventory accounted for under the LIFO method as having the same acquisition dates and costs that the inventory would have had if the FIFO inventory method had been used on the date of distribution or transfer. However, if the principal method of valuing inventories is the cost or market, whichever is lower, method, the acquiring corporation must treat the inventories accounted for under the LIFO method as having been acquired at cost or market, whichever is lower.
(7) Appropriate times for certain determinations--(i) Determining the inventory method. The inventory method used by a party to a section 381(a) transaction on the date of distribution or transfer is the method used by that party as of the end of the day that is immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer.
(i) Determining the inventory method. The inventory method used by a party to a section 381(a) transaction on the date of distribution or transfer is the method used by that party as of the end of the day that is immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer.
(ii) Determining whether there are separate and distinct trades or businesses after the date of distribution or transfer. Whether an acquiring corporation will operate the trades or businesses of the parties to a section 381(a) transaction as separate and distinct trades or businesses after the date of distribution or transfer will be determined as of the date of distribution or transfer based upon the facts and circumstances. Intent to combine books and records of the trades or businesses may be demonstrated by contemporaneous records and documents or by other objective evidence that reflects the acquiring corporation's ultimate plan of operation, even though the actual combination of the books and records may extend beyond the end of the taxable year that includes the date of distribution or transfer.
(8) Establishing an inventory method. An inventory method used by the distributor or transferor corporation immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer that continues to be used by the acquiring corporation after the date of distribution or transfer is an established method of accounting for purposes of section 446(e), whether or not such method is proper or is permitted under the Internal Revenue Code or any applicable Income Tax Regulations.
(9) Other applicable provisions. This section does not preempt any other provision of the Internal Revenue Code or the Income Tax Regulations that is applicable to the acquiring corporation's circumstances. Section 381(c)(5) and this Sec. 1.381(c)(5)-1 determine only the inventory method to be used after a section 381(a) transaction. If other paragraphs of section 381(c) apply for purposes of determining the methods of accounting to be used following the date of distribution or transfer, section 381(c)(5) and this Sec. 1.381(c)(5)-1 will not apply to the tax treatment of the items. Specifically, section 381(c)(5) and this Sec. 1.381(c)(5)-1 do not apply to assets other than inventory that an acquiring corporation obtains in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies.
(10) Use of the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting. If immediately prior to the date of distribution or transfer, an acquiring corporation or a distributor or transferor corporation uses the cash receipts and disbursements method of accounting within the meaning of section 446(c)(1) and Sec. 1.446-1(c)(1)(i), or is not required to use an inventory method for its goods, section 381(c)(5) and Sec. 1.381(c)(5)-1 do not apply. Instead, section 381(c)(4) and Sec. 1.381(c)(4)-1 must be applied to determine the methods of accounting that continue after the transaction.
(11) Character of items of income and deduction. After the date of distribution or transfer, items of income and deduction have the same character in the hands of the acquiring corporation as they would have had in the hands of the distributor or transferor corporation if no distribution or transfer had occurred.
(12) Impermissible inventory method. This section does not limit the Commissioner's ability under section 446(b) to determine whether a taxpayer's inventory method is an impermissible method or otherwise fails to clearly reflect income. For example, an acquiring corporation may not use the method of accounting determined under paragraph (a)(2) of this section if the method fails to clearly reflect the acquiring corporation's income within the meaning of section 446(b).
(f) Effective/applicability date. This section applies to corporate reorganizations and tax-free liquidations described in section 381(a) that occur on or after August 31, 2011. [T.D. 9534, 76 FR 45682, Aug. 1, 2011; 76 FR 53820, Aug. 30, 2011] Sec. 1.381(c)(6)-1 Depreciation method.
(a) Carryover requirement--(1) Distributions in taxable years ending before July 25, 1969. (i) Section 381(c)(6) provides that if, in a transaction in a taxable year which ends before July 25, 1969, to which section 381(a) applies, an acquiring corporation acquires depreciable property from a distributor or transferor corporation which computes its allowance for the depreciation of the property under section 167(b)(2), (3), or (4), the acquiring corporation shall compute its depreciation allowance by the same method used by the distributor or transferor corporation with respect to such property. Thus, if the distributor or transferor corporation used the sum of the years-digits method under section 167(b)(3) with respect to an asset distributed or transferred to an acquiring corporation, the acquiring corporation will be required to use the sum of the years-digits method with respect to such asset acquired. The computation of the depreciation allowance with respect to the property acquired shall be made under the provisions of section 167 and the regulations thereunder.
(1) Distributions in taxable years ending before July 25, 1969. (i) Section 381(c)(6) provides that if, in a transaction in a taxable year which ends before July 25, 1969, to which section 381(a) applies, an acquiring corporation acquires depreciable property from a distributor or transferor corporation which computes its allowance for the depreciation of the property under section 167(b)(2), (3), or (4), the acquiring corporation shall compute its depreciation allowance by the same method used by the distributor or transferor corporation with respect to such property. Thus, if the distributor or transferor corporation used the sum of the years-digits method under section 167(b)(3) with respect to an asset distributed or transferred to an acquiring corporation, the acquiring corporation will be required to use the sum of the years-digits method with respect to such asset acquired. The computation of the depreciation allowance with respect to the property acquired shall be made under the provisions of section 167 and the regulations thereunder.
(i) Section 381(c)(6) provides that if, in a transaction in a taxable year which ends before July 25, 1969, to which section 381(a) applies, an acquiring corporation acquires depreciable property from a distributor or transferor corporation which computes its allowance for the depreciation of the property under section 167(b)(2), (3), or (4), the acquiring corporation shall compute its depreciation allowance by the same method used by the distributor or transferor corporation with respect to such property. Thus, if the distributor or transferor corporation used the sum of the years-digits method under section 167(b)(3) with respect to an asset distributed or transferred to an acquiring corporation, the acquiring corporation will be required to use the sum of the years-digits method with respect to such asset acquired. The computation of the depreciation allowance with respect to the property acquired shall be made under the provisions of section 167 and the regulations thereunder.
(ii) The rules provided in section 381(c)(6) and subdivision (i) of this subparagraph will apply only with respect to that part or all of the basis of the property in the hands of the acquiring corporation immediately after the date of distribution or transfer as does not exceed the basis of the property in the hands of the distributor or transferor corporation on the date of the distribution or transfer. For this purpose, the basis of the property in the hands of the distributor or transferor corporation shall be the adjusted basis provided in section 1011 for the purpose of determining gain on the sale or other disposition of such property. For provisions defining the date of distribution or transfer see Sec. 1.381(b)-1(b).
(2) Distributions in taxable years ending after July 24, 1969. (i) Section 381(c)(6) provides that if, in a transaction in a taxable year ending after July 24, 1969, to which section 381(a) applies, an acquiring corporation acquires depreciable property from a distributor or transferor corporation which computes its allowances for the depreciation of the property under subsection (b), (j), or (k) of section 167, the acquiring corporation shall compute its depreciation allowance by the same method used by the distributor or transferor corporation with respect to such property. Thus, if the distributor or transferor corporation used the straight line method under section 167(b)(1) with respect to an asset distributed or transferred to an acquiring corporation, the acquiring corporation will be required to use the straight line method with respect to such asset. Similarly, if the distributor or transferor corporation elected to compute depreciation under section 167(k) with respect to property attributable to rehabilitation expenditures, and such property is transferred to an acquiring corporation, the acquiring corporation will be required to compute depreciation under section 167(k) with respect to the property acquired. The computation of the depreciation allowance with respect to the property acquired shall be made under the provisions of section 167 and the regulations thereunder.
(i) Section 381(c)(6) provides that if, in a transaction in a taxable year ending after July 24, 1969, to which section 381(a) applies, an acquiring corporation acquires depreciable property from a distributor or transferor corporation which computes its allowances for the depreciation of the property under subsection (b), (j), or (k) of section 167, the acquiring corporation shall compute its depreciation allowance by the same method used by the distributor or transferor corporation with respect to such property. Thus, if the distributor or transferor corporation used the straight line method under section 167(b)(1) with respect to an asset distributed or transferred to an acquiring corporation, the acquiring corporation will be required to use the straight line method with respect to such asset. Similarly, if the distributor or transferor corporation elected to compute depreciation under section 167(k) with respect to property attributable to rehabilitation expenditures, and such property is transferred to an acquiring corporation, the acquiring corporation will be required to compute depreciation under section 167(k) with respect to the property acquired. The computation of the depreciation allowance with respect to the property acquired shall be made under the provisions of section 167 and the regulations thereunder.
(ii) The rules provided in section 381(c)(6) and subdivision (i) of this subparagraph shall apply only with respect to that part or all of the basis of the property in the hands of the acquiring corporation immediately after the date of distribution or transfer as does not exceed the basis of the property in the hands of the distributor or transferor corporation on the date of the distribution or transfer. For this purpose, the basis of the property in the hands of the distributor or transferor corporation shall be the adjusted basis provided in section 1011 for the purpose of determining gain on the sale or other disposition of such property. For provisions defining the date of distribution or transfer see Sec. 1.38(b)-1(b).
(b) Portion in excess of distributor or transferor corporation's basis--(1) General rule. With respect to that part of the basis of the depreciable property (other than certain section 1250 property described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph) which in the hands of the acquiring corporation exceeds the adjusted basis to the distributor or transferor corporation, the acquiring corporation may use any reasonable method of computing depreciation, other than the methods provided in section 167(b)(2), (3), or (4). See paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.167(b)-0 for methods which are acceptable under section 167(a) with respect to such property. See also sections 334(b)(1) and 362(b) for the determination of basis of property in the hands of the acquiring corporation in connection with a transaction to which section 381(a) applies.
(1) General rule. With respect to that part of the basis of the depreciable property (other than certain section 1250 property described in subparagraph (2) of this paragraph) which in the hands of the acquiring corporation exceeds the adjusted basis to the distributor or transferor corporation, the acquiring corporation may use any reasonable method of computing depreciation, other than the methods provided in section 167(b)(2), (3), or (4). See paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.167(b)-0 for methods which are acceptable under section 167(a) with respect to such property. See also sections 334(b)(1) and 362(b) for the determination of basis of property in the hands of the acquiring corporation in connection with a transaction to which section 381(a) applies.
(2) Section 1250 property. With respect to that part of the basis of section 1250 property acquired after July 24, 1969, which in the hands of the acquiring corporation exceeds the adjusted basis to the distributor or transferor corporation, the acquiring corporation shall be subject to the limitations contained in section 167(j)(4) (relating to used section 1250 property) or 167(j)(5) (relating to used residential rental property). Thus, for example, if section 1250 property which is not residential rental property is acquired in a section 381(a) transaction after July 24, 1969, the straight line method of depreciation (or other method allowable under section 167(j)(4)(B)) is the only acceptable method with respect to that portion of the basis of the property which, in the hands of the acquiring corporation, exceeds the adjusted basis to the transferor or distributor corporation.
(c) Records required. Records shall be maintained in sufficient detail to identify any depreciable property to which this section applies, and to establish the basis thereof.
(d) Agreement under section 167(d). To the extent not inconsistent with paragraph (b) of this section, an acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation in the case of an agreement between the distributor or transferor corporation and the district director under section 167(d) and Sec. 1.167(d)-1 with respect to property to which section 381(c)(6) and this section apply. Thus, in the case where the basis of an asset in the hands of an acquiring corporation exceeds the basis of such asset in the hands of the distributor or the transferor corporation, such an agreement will not have the effect of permitting the acquiring corporation to compute its depreciation allowance with respect to such excess basis under the methods provided in section 167(b)(2), (3), or (4). However, the provisions of the agreement will continue to apply with respect to the useful life of the asset.
(e) Change of method of depreciation. Although the acquiring corporation is required to use the method of computing depreciation used by the distributor or transferor with respect to depreciable property to which this section applies, such acquiring corporation may use another method with respect to such property if consent of the Commissioner is obtained in accordance with paragraph (e) of Sec. 1.446-1. Further, subject to the provisions of paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.167(e)-1 the acquiring corporation may change from the declining balance method described in section 167(b)(2) to the straight line method without consent of the Commissioner.
(f) Successive transactions to which section 381(a) applies. The provisions of this section shall apply in the case of successive transactions to which section 381(a) applies. Thus, for example, if X Corporation, a transferor corporation, used the sum of the years-digits method under section 167(b)(3) with respect to an asset transferred to Y Corporation, an acquiring corporation, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, and subsequently Y Corporation, using the same method, transfers such asset to Z Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) also applies, then Z Corporation shall be required to use the sum of the years-digits method with respect to such asset.
(g) Illustration. The application of this section may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. M and N Corporations compute their taxable incomes on the basis of the calendar year. On December 31, 1959, M Corporation transfers all of its assets to N Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. Included among these assets is an item of depreciable property which on that date has an adjusted basis (for determining gain) of $800,000 after M Corporation takes into account for 1959 its allowance for depreciation under section 167(b)(2). The basis attributable to the asset under section 362(b) is determined to be $900,000 in the hands of N Corporation. Under the provisions of section 381(c)(6) and paragraph (a) of this section, N Corporation is required to compute its allowance for the depreciation of the asset under section 167(b)(2) for 1960 and subsequent years but only in respect of $800,000 of its basis. N Corporation may use any reasonable method other than the methods provided in section 167(b)(2), (3), or (4) in computing its depreciation allowance of the remaining $100,000. [T.D. 6559, 26 FR 2983, Apr. 7, 1961, as amended by T.D. 7166, 37 FR 5246, Mar. 11, 1972; 37 FR 6400, Mar. 29, 1972] Sec. 1.381(c)(8)-1 Installment method.
(a) Carryover requirement. (1) Section 381(c)(8) provides that if, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, an acquiring corporation acquires installment obligations, the income from which the distributor or transferor corporation has elected under section 453 and the regulations thereunder to report on the installment method, then the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation would have been treated under section 453 had it not transferred the installment obligations. Thus, if the distributor or transferor corporation had properly elected to return income from the sale or other disposition of property giving rise to the obligations on the installment method, then the acquiring corporation shall be required to return the income from all such installment obligations in the same manner and to the same extent as the distributor or transferor corporation, unless consent of the Commissioner to use another method is obtained in accordance with paragraph (e) of Sec. 1.446-1. Amounts received by the acquiring corporation on or after the date of distribution or transfer with respect to an installment sale made by the distributor or transferor corporation will not be taken into account in applying the limitation under section 453(b)(2) with respect to the amount of payments received in the year of sale or other disposition.
(1) Section 381(c)(8) provides that if, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, an acquiring corporation acquires installment obligations, the income from which the distributor or transferor corporation has elected under section 453 and the regulations thereunder to report on the installment method, then the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation would have been treated under section 453 had it not transferred the installment obligations. Thus, if the distributor or transferor corporation had properly elected to return income from the sale or other disposition of property giving rise to the obligations on the installment method, then the acquiring corporation shall be required to return the income from all such installment obligations in the same manner and to the same extent as the distributor or transferor corporation, unless consent of the Commissioner to use another method is obtained in accordance with paragraph (e) of Sec. 1.446-1. Amounts received by the acquiring corporation on or after the date of distribution or transfer with respect to an installment sale made by the distributor or transferor corporation will not be taken into account in applying the limitation under section 453(b)(2) with respect to the amount of payments received in the year of sale or other disposition.
(2) Section 381(c)(8) and this section have no application to sales or other dispositions of property made by the acquiring corporation on or after the date of distribution or transfer. For provisions defining the date of distribution or transfer, see Sec. 1.381(b)-1(b). See section 381(c)(4) and the regulations thereunder for rules relating to the proper method or combination of methods of accounting to be used by the acquiring corporation.
(b) Basis of obligations. The basis in the hands of an acquiring corporation of installment obligations described in section 381(c)(8) and paragraph (a) of this section shall be the same as in the hands of the distributor or transferor corporation.
(c) Repossession of property sold in prior years. If the acquiring corporation repossesses property, previously sold by the distributor or transferor corporation, by reason of default by the purchaser in payment of the acquired installment obligations, then the acquiring corporation shall be treated as though it were the vendor corporation for purposes of determining, under section 453 and the regulations thereunder, the gain, loss, income, or deduction with respect to the property repossessed. [T.D. 6559, 26 FR 2983, Apr. 7, 1961] Sec. 1.381(c)(9)-1 Amortization of bond discount or premium.
(a) Carryover requirement. If, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation assumes liability for the payment of bonds of a distributor or transferor corporation which were issued at a discount or premium, then under the provisions of section 381(c)(9) the acquiring corporation is to be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation after the date of distribution or transfer for purposes of determining the amount of amortization allowable, or includible, with respect to such discount or premium in computing taxable income. Thus, if subsequent to February 28, 1913, a distributor or transferor corporation issues bonds at a premium and the liability for them is assumed by the acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, then the net amount of the premium is income which should be prorated or amortized over the life of the bonds, including the period during which the acquiring corporation is liable upon the obligations assumed. On the other hand, if a distributor or transferor corporation issues bonds at a discount and the liability for them is assumed by the acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, then the net amount of the discount is deductible in computing taxable income but should be prorated or amortized over the life of the bonds, including the period during which the acquiring corporation is liable upon the obligations assumed.
(b) Expense incurred upon issuance of bonds. If, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation assumes liability for bonds of a distributor or transferor corporation which were issued at a discount or premium, the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation after the date of distribution or transfer with respect to the expense incurred upon the issuance of such bonds.
(c) Purchase of bonds. If, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation assumes liability for bonds of a distributor or transferor corporation which were issued at a discount or premium and if the acquiring corporation subsequently purchases such bonds, then the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation for the purpose of determining the amount of any income or deduction resulting from the purchase. See paragraph (c) of Sec. 1.61-12. For rules relating to the exchange or substitution of bonds issued by the acquiring corporation for bonds of a distributor or transferor corporation, see paragraph (d) of this section.
(d) Exchange of new for old bonds. Notwithstanding any other provision of this section, if--
(1) In a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, bonds of the acquiring corporation are exchanged or substituted for bonds of a distributor or transferor corporation which were issued at a discount or premium, or
(2) Bonds of the acquiring corporation are exchanged or substituted for bonds of a distributor or transferor corporation which were issued at a discount or premium and in respect of which the acquiring corporation has assumed the liability in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, then, with respect to any unamortized discount, premium, or expense of issuance attributable to such bonds of the distributor or transferor corporation, the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation.
(e) Bonds of a distributor or transferor corporation. For purposes of applying section 381(c)(9), the term bonds of a distributor or transferor corporation includes not only bonds issued by the distributor or transferor corporation but also bonds for which the distributor or transferor corporation has assumed liability. Thus, if the distributor or transferor corporation has assumed liability for bonds in a transaction in which any unamortized discount or premium attributable to such bonds carried over to such corporation, then the acquiring corporation assuming liability for the bonds shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation after the date of distribution or transfer for purposes of determining the amount of amortization allowable, or includible, with respect to such discount or premium. On the other hand, if the distributor or transferor corporation has assumed liability for bonds in a transaction in which any unamortized discount or premium attributable to such bonds did not carry over to such corporation, then there can be no carryover to the acquiring corporation under this section. [T.D. 6532, 26 FR 405, Jan. 19, 1961] Sec. 1.381(c)(10)-1 Deferred exploration and development expenditures.
(a) Carryover requirement. (1) If for any taxable year a distributor or transferor corporation has elected under section 615 or section 616 (or corresponding provisions of prior law) to defer and deduct on a ratable basis any exploration or development expenditures made in connection with any ore, mineral, mine, or other natural deposit transferred to the acquiring corporation in a transaction described in section 381(a), then under the provisions of section 381(c)(10) the acquiring corporation shall be entitled to deduct such expenditures on a ratable basis in the same manner, and to the same extent, as they would have been deductible by the distributor or transferor corporation in the absence of the distribution or transfer. For this purpose, the acquiring corporation shall be treated as though it were the distributor or transferor corporation. The principles set forth in paragraph (e) of Sec. 1.615-3 and paragraph (f) of Sec. 1.616-2 are applicable in computing the amount of the deduction allowable to the acquiring corporation in respect of expenditures deferred by a distributor or transferor corporation.
Example. X and Y Corporations are both organized on January 1, 1955, and both corporations compute their taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. During 1955, X Corporation purchases a mineral property which it begins to develop in 1956. During 1956, X Corporation incurs development expenditures of $500,000 in respect of such property which it elects to defer under section 616(b). On December 31, 1956, Y Corporation acquires all of the assets of X Corporation in a reorganization to which section 381(a) applies, no gain being recognized to X Corporation on the transfer. In 1957, Y Corporation sells 150,000 units of produced ore benefited by the development expenditures incurred and deferred by X Corporation, and the number of units remaining as of the end of 1957, plus the number of units sold during that year, is estimated to be 1,000,000. In addition to its deduction for depletion, Y Corporation is, in 1957, entitled to a deduction under sections 616(b) and 381(c)(10) of $75,000 of the development expenditures previously deferred by X Corporation, that is, $500,000 x 150,000/1,000,000.
(2) If a distributor or transferor corporation has elected under section 615 or section 616 (or corresponding provisions of prior law) to defer exploration or development expenditures in respect of a mine or other natural deposit which it subsequently disposes of except for a retained economic interest therein, such as the right to royalty income or in-ore payments, and such retained economic interest is transferred to the acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, then the acquiring corporation shall be entitled to deduct such deferred expenditures attributable to the economic interest retained on a ratable basis to the same extent they would have been deductible by the distributor or transferor corporation in the absence of the distribution or transfer. See paragraph (c) of Sec. 1.615-3 and paragraph (c) of Sec. 1.616-2.
(3) For purposes of this section, the terms exploration expenditures and development expenditures shall have the same meaning as that ascribed to them in the regulations under sections 615 and 616 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, or under sections 23(cc) and 23(ff) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1939, whichever applies. See, for example, paragraph (a) of Sec. 1.615-1 and paragraph (a) of Sec. 1.616-1.
(b) Effect and identification of election previously made. (1) The election made by a distributor or transferor corporation under the provisions of section 615 or section 616 (or corresponding provisions of prior law) to defer exploration or development expenditures in respect of any taxable year may not be revoked by the acquiring corporation for any reason whatsoever.
(1) The election made by a distributor or transferor corporation under the provisions of section 615 or section 616 (or corresponding provisions of prior law) to defer exploration or development expenditures in respect of any taxable year may not be revoked by the acquiring corporation for any reason whatsoever.
(2) When filing its return for the first taxable year for which it deducts exploration or development expenditures which were deferred under section 615 or section 616 (or corresponding provisions of prior law) by a distributor or transferor corporation, the acquiring corporation shall attach thereto a statement properly identifying the taxable year for which the election to defer was made by the distributor or transferor corporation, the name of the corporation which made the election, and the district director with whom the election was filed.
(3) It is unnecessary for an acquiring corporation to renew an election to defer exploration or development expenditures which was made by a distributor or transferor corporation.
(c) Successive transactions to which section 381(a) applies. If, by virtue of section 381(c)(10), the acquiring corporation is entitled to deduct exploration or development expenditures deferred by a distributor or transferor corporation, then such acquiring corporation shall be deemed to have made the election to defer such expenditures for purposes of applying section 381(c)(10) to any subsequent transaction in which such acquiring corporation is a distributor or transferor corporation.
(d) Carryover of limitation requirements. (1) If a distributor or transferor corporation transfers any mineral property to the acquiring corporation in a transaction described in section 381(a) and the acquiring corporation pays or incurs exploration expenditures in a taxable year ending after the date of the distribution or transfer, then in applying the 4-year or $400,000 limitations described in section 615(c) and paragraphs (a) and (b) of Sec. 1.615-4, whichever is applicable, the acquiring corporation shall be deemed to have been allowed any deduction which, for any taxable year ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer, was allowed to the distributor or transferor corporation under section 615(a), or under section 23(ff)(1) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1939, or to have made any election which, for any such preceding year, was made by the distributor or transferor corporation under section 615(b), or under section 23(ff)(2) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1939. Thus, in such instance, the acquiring corporation shall take into account the years in which the distributor or transferor corporation exercised the election to deduct or defer exploration expenditures and any amounts so deducted or deferred. For this purpose, it is immaterial whether the deduction has been allowed to, or the election has been made by, the distributor or transferor corporation with respect to the specific mineral property transferred by that corporation to the acquiring corporation.
(1) If a distributor or transferor corporation transfers any mineral property to the acquiring corporation in a transaction described in section 381(a) and the acquiring corporation pays or incurs exploration expenditures in a taxable year ending after the date of the distribution or transfer, then in applying the 4-year or $400,000 limitations described in section 615(c) and paragraphs (a) and (b) of Sec. 1.615-4, whichever is applicable, the acquiring corporation shall be deemed to have been allowed any deduction which, for any taxable year ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer, was allowed to the distributor or transferor corporation under section 615(a), or under section 23(ff)(1) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1939, or to have made any election which, for any such preceding year, was made by the distributor or transferor corporation under section 615(b), or under section 23(ff)(2) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1939. Thus, in such instance, the acquiring corporation shall take into account the years in which the distributor or transferor corporation exercised the election to deduct or defer exploration expenditures and any amounts so deducted or deferred. For this purpose, it is immaterial whether the deduction has been allowed to, or the election has been made by, the distributor or transferor corporation with respect to the specific mineral property transferred by that corporation to the acquiring corporation.
(2) Generally, for purposes of applying the 4-year limitation described in paragraph (a) of Sec. 1.615-4, if there are two or more distributor or transferor corporations that transfer any mineral property to the acquiring corporation, each taxable year of any such corporation ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer in which exploration expenditures were deducted or deferred shall be treated as a separate taxable year regardless of the fact that the taxable years of two or more such corporations normally end on the same date. However, if the date of distribution or transfer is the same with respect to more than one distributor or transferor corporation, then the taxable years of such corporations ending on the same date of distribution or transfer shall be considered as one taxable year for purposes of applying the 4-year limitation even though more than one such corporation deducted or deferred exploration expenditures for such taxable years.
(3) For purposes of applying the $400,000 limitation described in paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.615-4, if there are two or more distributor or transferor corporations that transfer any mineral property to the acquiring corporation, any exploration expenditures which were deducted or treated as deferred expenses by such corporations for taxable years ending after December 31, 1950, shall be taken into account by the acquiring corporation.
(4) If a distributor or transferor corporation that transfers any mineral property to the acquiring corporation was required to take into account any taxable years or amounts of its transferor, as provided by paragraph (e) of Sec. 1.615-4, for purposes of either the 4-year limitation described in paragraph (a) of Sec. 1.615-4 or the $400,000 limitation described in paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.615-4, then the acquiring corporation shall also take these taxable years and amounts into account in applying the same limitations.
(5) The provisions of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:
Example 1. M and N Corporations were organized on January 1, 1956, and each corporation computes its taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. For each of its taxable years 1956 and 1957, M Corporation expended $60,000 for exploration expenditures and exercised the option to deduct such amounts under section 615(a). N Corporation made no exploration expenditures during its taxable years 1956 and 1957. On December 31, 1957, M Corporation transferred all of its assets to N Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, no gain being recognized to the transferor corporation on the transfer. N Corporation made exploration expenditures of $100,000, $120,000, $110,000, and $100,000 for the years 1958, 1959, 1960, and 1961, respectively, which expenditures it desired to deduct under section 615(a) to the extent allowable. On the basis of these facts, N Corporation may deduct up to $100,000 for each of the years 1958 and 1959. No deduction or deferral is allowable for 1960 since the benefits of section 615(c) were previously availed of for 4 taxable years. However, N Corporation may deduct $80,000 for 1961 (the 4-year limitation not applying to such year) but, if such deduction is made, N Corporation will not be allowed any further deductions or deferrals since the $400,000 limitation of paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.615-4 will have been reached.
Example 2. R and S Corporations were organized on January 1, 1955, and each corporation computes its income on the basis of the calendar year. For the 1955 taxable year neither corporation made any exploration expenditures under section 615(a). On June 30, 1956, R Corporation transferred all its assets to S Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, no gain being recognized to the transferor corporation on the transfer. During its short taxable year ending June 30, 1956, R Corporation made exploration expenditures of $60,000 which it elected to deduct under section 615. For its taxable year ending December 31, 1956, S Corporation may deduct or defer exploration expenditures up to $100,000 since this is a separate election for purposes of utilizing section 615 and is not affected by the $60,000 previously deducted by R Corporation. Assuming S Corporation exercises an election under section 615 for its taxable year ending December 31, 1956, S Corporation may elect to apply the benefits of section 615 to exploration expenditures for two more taxable years. However, for taxable years beginning after July 6, 1960 (the 4-year limitation not applying), S Corporation is entitled under section 615 to deduct or defer exploration expenditures made in such years to the extent that the combined deductions and deferrals by R and S Corporations in prior years did not exceed $400,000.
Example 3. O and P Corporations were organized on January 1, 1955, and each corporation computes its taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. For their taxable years 1955, 1956, and 1957, each corporation deducted exploration expenditures made in such years under section 615(a). On June 30, 1958, O Corporation transferred all its assets to P Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, no gain being recognized to the transferor corporation on the transfer. If, during its short taxable year ending June 30, 1958, O Corporation made additional exploration expenditures, it may deduct or defer such expenditures (up to $100,000) under section 615 since O Corporation has utilized section 615 in only three previous taxable years. For its taxable years ending after June 30, 1958, and beginning before July 7, 1960, P Corporation may not deduct or defer exploration expenditures under section 615, since the benefits of that section were utilized by O and P Corporations for 4 taxable years. However, for taxable years beginning after July 6, 1960 (the 4-year limitation not applying), P is entitled under section 615 to deduct or defer exploration expenditures made in such years to the extent that the combined deductions and deferrals by O and P Corporations in prior years do not exceed $400,000. See paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.615-4.
Example 4. X, Y, and Z Corporations were organized on January 1, 1955, and each corporation computes its taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. For their taxable years ending December 31, 1955, X and Y Corporations each deferred $100,000 for exploration expenditures made in such taxable years under section 615(b). Z Corporation made no exploration expenditures during its taxable year ending December 31, 1955. On March 31, 1956, X and Y Corporations transferred all their assets to Z Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, no gain being recognized to the transferor corporations on the transfer. X and Y Corporations each made exploration expenditures of $75,000 during their short taxable years ending March 31, 1956, which they deducted under section 615(a). For purposes of taxable years beginning before July 7, 1960, Z Corporation must take into account the taxable years in which X and Y Corporations deducted or deferred exploration expenditures. In so doing, each taxable year in which exploration expenditures were deducted or deferred must be taken into account except that the taxable years of X and Y Corporations ending on March 31, 1956, shall be considered as one taxable year. Therefore, Z Corporation may deduct or defer exploration expenditures in accordance with section 615 for any one taxable year ending after March 31, 1956, and beginning before July 7, 1960. However, for taxable years beginning after July 6, 1960 (the 4-year limitation not applying), Z Corporation must take into account for purposes of the $400,000 limitation all of the $350,000 of exploration expenditures deducted or deferred by X, Y, and Z Corporations during taxable years ending after December 31, 1950. Therefore, Z Corporation, assuming it has not deducted or deferred any exploration expenditures, is entitled under section 615 to deduct or defer in taxable years beginning after July 6, 1960, up to $50,000 for exploration expenditures made in such years.
Example 5. For purposes of this example, assumethat each taxpayer computes taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. Taxpayer A, an individual who has deducted exploration expenditures of $75,000 under section 23(ff) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1939 for each of his taxable years 1952 and 1953, transferred a mineral property to K Corporation on January 1, 1954, in a transaction in which the basis of the mineral property in the hands of K Corporation is determined under section 362(a). For its taxable year 1954 and pursuant to section 615(a)., K Corporation deducted exploration expenditures of $100,000 which it made in such year. K Corporation had made no exploration expenditures in any preceding taxable year. On December 31, 1954, K Corporation transferred all its assets to L Corporation in a reorganization to which section 381(a) applies, no gain being recognized to the transferor corporation on the transfer. Assuming that L Corporation has not deducted or deferred exploration expenditures in any preceding taxable year, L Corporation may deduct or defer exploration expenditures (up to $100,000) in accordance with section 615 for any one taxable year ending after December 31, 1954, and beginning before July 7, 1960, in view of the 4-year limitation. However, if L Corporation does not deduct or defer exploration expenditures in that period, then for taxable years beginning after July 6, 1960 (the 4-year limitation not applying), L Corporation is entitled to deduct or defer up to $150,000 (but not to exceed $100,000 per year) for exploration expenditures made in such years. See paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.615-4. [T.D. 6552, 26 FR 1988, Mar. 8, 1961, as amended by T.D. 6685, 28 FR 11406, Oct. 24, 1963] Sec. 1.381(c)(11)-1 Contributions to pension plan, employees' annuity plans, and stock bonus and profit-sharing plans.
(a) Carryover requirement. Section 381(c)(11) provides that, for purposes of determining amounts deductible under section 404 for any taxable year, the acquiring corporation shall be considered after the date of distribution or transfer to be the distributor or transferor corporation in respect of any pension, annuity, stock bonus, or profit-sharing plan.
(b) Nature of carryover. (1) Primarily, section 381(c)(11) and this section apply to the amount of any unused deductions or excess contributions carryovers which, in the absence of the transaction causing section 381 to apply, would have been available to the distributor or transferor corporation under section 404. Thus, for example, this section applies to unused deductions under a profit-sharing or stock bonus trust which, in accordance with the second sentence of section 404(a)(3)(A) and Sec. 1.404(a)-9, would have been available in succeeding taxable years to the transferor corporation if the transfer of assets to the acquiring corporation had not occurred.
(1) Primarily, section 381(c)(11) and this section apply to the amount of any unused deductions or excess contributions carryovers which, in the absence of the transaction causing section 381 to apply, would have been available to the distributor or transferor corporation under section 404. Thus, for example, this section applies to unused deductions under a profit-sharing or stock bonus trust which, in accordance with the second sentence of section 404(a)(3)(A) and Sec. 1.404(a)-9, would have been available in succeeding taxable years to the transferor corporation if the transfer of assets to the acquiring corporation had not occurred.
(2) Section 381(c)(11) also permits or requires the acquiring corporation to be treated as though it were the distributor or transferor corporation for the purpose of satisfying any conditions which would have been required of the distributor or transferor corporation in the absence of the distribution or transfer, so that it may be determined whether the distributor or transferor corporation, or the acquiring corporation, is entitled to take a deduction under section 404 in respect of a trust or plan established by the distributor or transferor corporation. Thus, for example, in a case when the taxable year of the transferor corporation ends on the date of transfer pursuant to section 381(b)(1), that corporation is entitled, pursuant to the provisions of section 404(a)(6) and paragraph (c) of Sec. 1.404(a)-1, to a deduction in such taxable year for a payment to a qualified trust of that corporation made by the acquiring corporation after the close of such taxable year but within the time specified in section 404(a)(6). In further illustration, if the transferor corporation were to establish a qualified plan, and if the plan were maintained as a qualified plan by the acquiring corporation, then any contributions paid under the plan by the acquiring corporation (other than those which are deductible by the transferor corporation by reason of section 404(a)(6)) would be deductible under section 404 by the acquiring corporation even though the plan were exclusively for the benefit of former employees of the transferor corporation. Also, for example, if the transferor corporation were to adopt an annuity plan during its taxable year ending on the date of transfer, the acquiring corporation would be entitled, subject to the provisions of section 401(b) and Sec. 1.401-5, to amend the plan so as to make it retroactively satisfy the requirements of section 401(a)(3), (4), (5), and (6) for the period beginning with the date on which the plan was put into effect.
(c) Taxable year of deduction. The first taxable year of the acquiring corporation in which any amount shall be allowed as a deduction to that corporation by reason of section 381(c)(11) and this section shall be its first taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer.
(d) Requirements for deductions. (1) In order for any amount paid by the acquiring corporation (other than amounts deductible under section 404(a)(5)) to be deductible by the acquiring corporation by reason of this section in respect of a trust or nontrusteed annuity plan which is established by a distributor or transferor corporation and maintained by the acquiring corporation, the contributions must be paid (or deemed to have been paid under section 404(a)(6)) by the acquiring corporation in a taxable year of that corporation which ends with or within a year of the trust for which it is exempt under section 501(a), or, in the case of a nontrusteed annuity plan, for which it meets the requirements of section 404(a)(2). See, however, section 404(a)(4) and Sec. 1.404(a)-11 for rules relating to deductions for contributions to foreign-situs trusts. The trust or plan which is established by the distributor or transferor corporation and maintained by the acquiring corporation may separately satisfy the requirements of section 401(a) or section 404(a)(2) or may, together with other trusts or plans of the acquiring corporation, constitute a single plan which qualifies under section 401(a) or meets the requirements of section 404(a)(2).
(1) In order for any amount paid by the acquiring corporation (other than amounts deductible under section 404(a)(5)) to be deductible by the acquiring corporation by reason of this section in respect of a trust or nontrusteed annuity plan which is established by a distributor or transferor corporation and maintained by the acquiring corporation, the contributions must be paid (or deemed to have been paid under section 404(a)(6)) by the acquiring corporation in a taxable year of that corporation which ends with or within a year of the trust for which it is exempt under section 501(a), or, in the case of a nontrusteed annuity plan, for which it meets the requirements of section 404(a)(2). See, however, section 404(a)(4) and Sec. 1.404(a)-11 for rules relating to deductions for contributions to foreign-situs trusts. The trust or plan which is established by the distributor or transferor corporation and maintained by the acquiring corporation may separately satisfy the requirements of section 401(a) or section 404(a)(2) or may, together with other trusts or plans of the acquiring corporation, constitute a single plan which qualifies under section 401(a) or meets the requirements of section 404(a)(2).
(2) Excess contributions paid under a qualified trust or plan established by the transferor or distributor corporation may be carried over and, subject to the applicable limitations, deducted by the acquiring corporation in a taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer regardless of whether the trust is exempt, or the plan meets the requirements of section 404(a)(2), during such taxable year. There are, however, special rules for computing the limitations on the amount of excess contributions which are deductible in a taxable year ending after the trust or plan has terminated (see Sec. 1.404(a)-7, paragraph (e) of Sec. 1.404(a)-9, and paragraph (a) of Sec. 1.404(a)-13). For this purpose, the pension, annuity, stock bonus, or profit-sharing plan of the distributor or transferor corporation under which the excess contributions were made shall be considered continued (and not terminated) by the acquiring corporation if, after the date of distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation continues the plan as a separate and distinct plan of its own which continues to qualify under section 401(a), or to meet the requirements of section 404(a)(2), or consolidates or replaces that plan with a comparable plan. See subparagraph (4) of this paragraph for rules relating to what constitutes a ``comparable'' plan.
(3) In order for any amount paid by the acquiring corporation to be deductible by the acquiring corporation as an unused deduction carried over from a qualified profit-sharing or stock bonus trust established by a distributor or transferor corporation, the acquiring corporation must continue such trust established by the distributor or transferor corporation as a separate and distinct trust of its own which continues to qualify under section 401(a), or must consolidate or replace that trust with a comparable trust. In addition, the amount paid by the acquiring corporation will be deductible as an unused deduction carried over from the transferor or distributor corporation only if it is paid into the profit-sharing or stock bonus trust established by the transferor or distributor corporation, or the comparable trust, in a taxable year of the acquiring corporation which ends with or within a year of such trust (or such comparable trust) for which it meets the requirements of section 401(a) and is exempt under section 501(a). See subparagraph (4) of this paragraph for rules relating to what constitutes a ``comparable'' trust.
(4) For purposes of subparagraphs (2) and (3) of this paragraph, a plan under which deductions are determined pursuant to paragraph (1) or (2) of section 404(a) shall be considered comparable to another plan under which deductions are determined pursuant to either of those paragraphs, and a plan under which deductions are determined pursuant to paragraph (3) of section 404(a) shall be considered comparable to another plan under which deductions are determined pursuant to such paragraph (3). Thus, a profit-sharing plan (which qualifies under section 401(a)) established by the transferor or distributor corporation shall, for purposes of subparagraphs (2) and (3) of this paragraph, be considered terminated if, after the date of distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation transfers the funds accumulated under the profit-sharing plan into a pension plan covering the same employees. In such a case, excess contributions paid under the profit-sharing plan by the distributor or transferor corporation may be carried over and deducted by the acquiring corporation in a taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer subject to the limitations in section 404(a)(3)(A) computed in accordance with the rules in paragraph (e)(2) of Sec. 1.404(a)-9 for computing limitations when a profit-sharing plan has terminated. On the other hand, unused deductions attributable to the profit sharing plan may not be carried over and used by the acquiring corporation as a basis for deducting amounts contributed by it to the pension plan.
(e) Effect of consolidation or replacement of plan on prior contributions. If a pension, annuity, stock bonus, or profit-sharing plan which was established by a distributor or transferor corporation is terminated after the date of distribution or transfer because of consolidation or replacement with a comparable plan of the acquiring corporation, then the contributions paid to or under its plan by the distributor or transferor corporation on or before the date of distribution or transfer shall not be disallowed under section 404 merely because of the termination of the plan which was established by that corporation, provided that the termination does not cause the plan to fail to qualify under section 401(a).
(f) Amounts deductible under section 404. Section 381(c)(11) and this section apply only to amounts which are otherwise deductible under section 404 and the regulations thereunder. See Sec. Sec. 1.404(a)-1 through 1.404(d)-1. Thus, to be deductible by reason of this section, contributions paid by the acquiring corporation must be expenses which otherwise satisfy the conditions of section 162 (relating to trade or business expenses). No deduction shall be allowed by reason of section 381(c)(11) and this section for a contribution which is allowable under section 162 but is not allowable under section 404. Thus, the acquiring corporation shall not be allowed a deduction by reason of this section in respect of a plan established by a distributor or transferor corporation if the contribution would not otherwise be deductible under section 404 by reason of section 404(c) and Sec. 1.404(c)-1. On the other hand, any unused deductions or excess contributions of a distributor or transferor corporation which are carried over from 1939 Code years shall be deductible by the acquiring corporation if the requirements of this section, section 404(d), and Sec. 1.404(d)-1 are satisfied.
(g) Cost of past service credits. In computing the cost of past service credits under a plan with respect to employees of the distributor or transferor corporation, the acquiring corporation may include the cost of credits for periods during which the employees were in the service of the distributor or transferor corporation.
(h) Separate carryovers required. The excess contributions which are available to a distributor or transferor corporation under the provisions of section 404(a)(1)(D) and section 404(a)(3)(A) at the close of the date of distribution or transfer and are carried over to the acquiring corporation under this section shall be kept separate and distinct from each other and from any excess contributions which are available to the distributor or transferor corporation at that time under the provisions of section 404(a)(7) and are carried over to the acquiring corporation under this section. If there are excess contributions carried over to the acquiring corporation from more than one transferor or distributor corporation, the excess contributions of each transferor or distributor corporation shall be kept separate and distinct from those of the other transferor or distributor corporations and, with respect to each such transferor or distributor corporation, shall be kept separate and distinct as provided in the preceding sentence. See, however, paragraph (i) of this section for rules for applying the provisions of section 404(a)(3)(A) when the acquiring corporation maintains two or more profit-sharing or stock bonus trusts, one or more of which was established by a distributor or transferor corporation. The requirements in this paragraph shall apply with respect to any excess contributions which are carried over to the acquiring corporation from a distributor or transferor corporation under the provisions of section 404(d) and this section.
(i) Limitations applicable to profit-sharing or stock bonus trusts. When contributions are paid by the acquiring corporation after the date of distribution or transfer to two or more profit-sharing or stock bonus trusts, and one or more of such trusts was established by a distributor or transferor corporation, such trusts shall be considered as a single trust in applying the provisions of section 404(a)(3)(A) under this section. Accordingly, in determining its secondary limitation, and its excess contributions carryover, under section 404(a)(3)(A) and Sec. 1.404(a)-9 in any taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation shall take into accounts its primary limitations, and the deductions allowed or allowable to it, for all prior years under the limitations provided in those sections, and also the primary limitations of, and deductions allowed or allowable to, the distributor or transferor corporation or corporations for all prior years under the limitations provided in those sections.
(j) Successive carryovers. The provisions of section 381(c)(11) and this section shall apply to an acquiring corporation which, in a distribution or transfer to which section 381(a) applies acquires the assets of a distributor or transferor corporation which has previously acquired the assets of another corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, even though, in computing an unused deductions or excess contributions carryover to the second acquiring corporation, it is necessary to take into account contributions paid by, and limitations applicable to, the first distributor or transferor corporation.
(k) Information to be furnished by acquiring corporation. The acquiring corporation shall furnish such information with respect to a plan established by a distributor or transferor corporation as will, consistently with the principles of section 404, establish that the provisions of such section and this section apply. For purposes of this section, the district director may require any other information that he considers necessary to determine deductions allowable under section 404 and this section or qualification under section 401. Any unused deductions or excess contributions carried over from a distributor or transferor corporation pursuant to this section shall be properly identified with the corporation which would have been permitted to use those deductions or contributions in the absence of the transaction causing section 381 to apply.
(l) Illustration. The application of this section may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. In 1955, X Corporation, which makes its return on the basis of the calendar year, paid $400,000 to completely fund past service credits under a qualified pension plan and deducted 10 percent ($40,000) of that cost in each of the taxable years 1955, 1956, and 1957. The pension plan established by X Corporation had an anniversary date of January 1. On December 31, 1957, on which date the undeducted part of the cost amounted to $280,000, X Corporation transferred all its assets to Y Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. Y Corporation, which also makes its return on the basis of the calendar year, had a qualified pension plan and trust which also had an anniversary date of January 1. Since Y Corporation had many more employees than X Corporation on the date of transfer, it covered the former employees of X Corporation under its own plan. Y Corporation is entitled to deductions under section 404(a)(1)(D) and this section in 1958 and succeeding taxable years, in order of time, with respect to the undeducted balance of $280,000, to the extent of the difference between the amount paid and deductible by that corporation in each such taxable year and the maximum amount deductible by that corporation for such taxable year in accordance with the applicable limitations of section 404(a)(1). In computing the maximum amount deductible by Y Corporation for 1958 and 1959 under section 404(a)(1)(C), that corporation may include $40,000 for each year, the amount that X Corporation could have included for each of those years in computing the maximum amount that would have been deductible by X Corporation under section 404(a)(1)(C) if the merger had not occurred. Thus, assuming that Y Corporation's appropriate limitation so computed under section 404(a)(1)(C) is $1,000,000 (including the $40,000 carried over from X Corporation under this section) for each of those taxable years, and that Y Corporation contributed $925,000 to its trust in 1958 and $975,000 in 1959, then Y Corporation is entitled under section 404(a)(1)(D) and this section to deduct in 1958 $75,000, and in 1959 $25,000, of the amount ($280,000) carried over from X Corporation. The undeducted balance of such amount ($180,000) available to Y Corporation on December 31, 1959, would be deductible by that corporation in succeeding taxable years in accordance with section 404(a)(1)(D) and this section. [T.D. 6556, 26 FR 2405, Mar. 22, 1961, as amended by T.D. 7168, 37 FR 5024, Mar. 9, 1972] Sec. 1.381(c)(12)-1 Recovery of bad debts, prior taxes, or delinquency amounts.
(a) Carryover requirement. (1) If, as a result of a distribution or transfer to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation is entitled to the recovery of a bad debt, prior tax, or delinquency amount on account of which a deduction or credit was allowed to a distributor or transferor corporation for a prior taxable year, and such debt, tax, or amount is recovered by the acquiring corporation after the date of distribution or transfer, then under the provisions of section 381(c)(12) the acquiring corporation is required to include in its gross income for the taxable year of recovery the same amount of income attributable to the recovery as the distributor or transferor corporation would have been required to include under section 111 and the regulations thereunder had the distribution or transfer not occurred.
(1) If, as a result of a distribution or transfer to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation is entitled to the recovery of a bad debt, prior tax, or delinquency amount on account of which a deduction or credit was allowed to a distributor or transferor corporation for a prior taxable year, and such debt, tax, or amount is recovered by the acquiring corporation after the date of distribution or transfer, then under the provisions of section 381(c)(12) the acquiring corporation is required to include in its gross income for the taxable year of recovery the same amount of income attributable to the recovery as the distributor or transferor corporation would have been required to include under section 111 and the regulations thereunder had the distribution or transfer not occurred.
(2) The rule prescribed by paragraph (a)(1) of this section and by section 381(c)(12) with respect to bad debts, prior taxes, and delinquency amounts applies equally with respect to the recovery by the acquiring corporation of all other losses, expenditures, and accruals made on the basis of deductions from the gross income of a distributor or transferor corporation for prior taxable years, including war losses referred to in section 127 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1939, but not including deductions with respect to depreciation, depletion, amortization, or amortizable bond premiums. An item which is not a ``section 111 item'' for purposes of the regulations under section 111 is not subject to the provisions of section 381(c)(12). The provisions of section 111(c) shall be applied with respect to a recovery by the acquiring corporation in the same manner as they would have been applied by the distributor or transferor corporation.
(b) Amount of recovery exclusion allowable for year of recovery. For the year of any recovery by the acquiring corporation, the amount of the recovery exclusion for the original taxable year shall be determined in accordance with paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.111-1. For the purpose of this paragraph and section 381(c)(12), the recovery exclusion for any year with respect to section 111 items of the acquiring corporation shall be kept separate from the recovery exclusion for any year with respect to section 111 items of each distributor or transferor corporation. The recovery by the acquiring corporation of any section 111 item of such corporation after the date of the distribution or transfer shall be considered separately from recoveries by the acquiring corporation of any such item which was deducted or credited by a distributor or transferor corporation. Any recovery by the acquiring corporation of a section 111 item shall be excluded from the gross income of the acquiring corporation to the extent of the recovery exclusion (1) determined for the original year for which that item was deducted or credited by the specific corporation which claimed the deduction or credit and (2) reduced by the excludable recoveries (whether made by the acquiring corporation, or by the distributor or transferor corporation) in intervening years with respect to the recovery exclusion of such corporation for such original year. There shall be taken into account the effect of net operating loss carryovers and carrybacks or capital loss carryovers.
(c) Illustration of carryover of recovery exclusion--(1) Facts. (i) The application of section 381(c)(12) may be illustrated by the following example. M and N Corporations are both organized on January 1, 1957, and both corporations compute their taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. On December 31, 1959, M Corporation transfers all its assets to N Corporation in a reorganization to which section 381(a) applies.
(1) Facts. (i) The application of section 381(c)(12) may be illustrated by the following example. M and N Corporations are both organized on January 1, 1957, and both corporations compute their taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. On December 31, 1959, M Corporation transfers all its assets to N Corporation in a reorganization to which section 381(a) applies.
(i) The application of section 381(c)(12) may be illustrated by the following example. M and N Corporations are both organized on January 1, 1957, and both corporations compute their taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. On December 31, 1959, M Corporation transfers all its assets to N Corporation in a reorganization to which section 381(a) applies.
(ii) The section 111 items of the two corporations for the following taxable years are as follows, identification of such items being made by an appropriate letter: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
M N
Taxable year of deduction or credit Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1957......................................... $500(g) $200(h)1958......................................... 300(i) 400(j)1959......................................... 600(k) 100(m)------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iii) The recovery exclusions in respect of such taxable years, computed in accordance with Sec. 1.111-1(b)(2), are assumed to be as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
M N
Taxable year Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1957......................................... $400 $1501958......................................... 200 3001959......................................... 500 75------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iv) The recoveries of the above-mentioned section 111 items by the two corporations are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
M N
Taxable year of recovery Corporation Corporation
(transferor) (acquirer)------------------------------------------------------------------------1958......................................... $25 (g) $50 (h)
1959......................................... 50 (g) 20 (h)
30 (i) 15 (j)1960......................................... ............ 350 (g)
225 (i)
550 (k)
100 (h)
350 (j)
85 (m)------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) M Corporation's 1958 recovery. Total recovery of section 111 items for 1957..................... $25
Less: Recovery exclusion for 1957.............................. 400
------
Amount included in gross income of M Corporation for 1958.... 0
------
(3) M Corporation's 1959 recoveries. (i) Total recovery of section 111 items for 1957................. $50
Less: Recovery exclusion for 1957....................... $400
Minus excludable recovery............................... 25
-------
..... 375
Amount included in gross income of M Corporation for 1959.... 0(ii) Total recovery of section 111 items for 1958................ 30
Less: Recovery exclusion for 1958.............................. 200
--------
Amount included in gross income of M Corporation for 1959.... 0
(4) N Corporation's 1958 recovery. Total recovery of section 111 items for 1957..................... $50
Less: Recovery exclusion for 1957.............................. 150
------
Amount included in gross income of N Corporation for 1958.... 0
(5) N Corporation's 1959 recoveries. (i) Total recovery of section 111 items for 1957................. $20
Less: Recovery exclusion for 1957....................... $150
Minus excludable recovery in 1958....................... 50
-------
..... 100
Amount included in gross income of N Corporation for 1959.... 0(ii) Total recovery of section 111 items for 1958................ 15
Less: Recovery exclusion for 1958.............................. 300
--------
Amount included in gross income of N Corporation for 1959.... 0
(6) N Corporation's 1960 recoveries. (i) Total recovery of section 111 items of M Corporation for 1957 $350
Less: Recovery exclusion of M Corporation for 1957............. $400
Minus:
Excludable recovery in 1959.................. $50
Excludable recovery in 1958.................. 25
-------
..... 75
..... ..... 325
Amount included in gross income of N Corporation for 1960.. 25(ii) Total recovery of section 111 items of M Corporation for 225
1958............................................................
Less: Recovery exclusion of M Corporation for 1958...... $200
Minus excludable recovery in 1959..................... 30
-------
..... 170
Amount included in gross income of N Corporation for 1960.. 55(iii) Total recovery of section 111 items of M Corporation for 550
1959............................................................
Less: Recovery exclusion of M Corporation for 1959............. 500
--------
Amount included in gross income of N Corporation for 1960.. 50(iv) Total recovery of section 111 items of N Corporation for 100
1957............................................................
Less: Recovery exclusion of N Corporation for 1957...... $150
Minus:
Excludable recovery in 1959.................. $20
Excludable recovery in 1958.................. 50
-------
..... 70
..... ..... 80
Amount included in gross income of N Corporation for 1960 20(v) Total recovery of section 111 items of N Corporation for 1958 $350
Less: Recovery exclusion of N Corporation for 1958...... $300
Minus excludable recovery in 1959....................... 15
-------
..... 285
Amount included in gross income of N Corporation for 1960.... 65(vi) Total recovery of section 111 items of N Corporation for 85
1959............................................................
Less: Recovery exclusion of N Corporation for 1959............. 75
--------
Amount included in gross income of N Corporation for 1960.... 10
(7) Summary of recoveries included in gross income of N Corporation for 1960. (i) Recovery of M Corporation items for:
1957.................................................... $25
1958.................................................... 55
1959.................................................... 50
--------
..... $130
------(ii) Recovery of N corporation items for:
1957.................................................... 20
1958.................................................... 65
1959.................................................... 10
--------
..... 95
------
Total amount included in gross income........................ 225
[T.D. 6559, 26 FR 2984, Apr. 7, 1961] Sec. 1.381(c)(13)-1 Involuntary conversions.
(a) Carryover requirement--(1) General rule. Section 381(c)(13) requires that after the date of distribution or transfer the acquiring corporation, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation for purposes of applying section 1033, relating to involuntary conversions. This rule shall apply even though the property similar or related in service or use to the property converted, or the stock of a corporation owning such similar property, is purchased by the acquiring corporation after the date of distribution or transfer and is not received from the distributor or transferor corporation in the transaction to which section 381(a) applies. Accordingly, if any factor essential to the application of section 1033 occurs on or before the date of distribution or transfer and any other such factor also occurs after that date, then, in accordance with section 381(c)(13) and this section, the provisions of section 1033 shall apply to the acquiring corporation in the same manner that they would have applied to the distributor or transferor corporation in the absence of the distribution or transfer. For purposes of this section, the terms involuntary conversion and disposition of the converted property shall have the meaning ascribed to them by the regulations under section 1033.
(1) General rule. Section 381(c)(13) requires that after the date of distribution or transfer the acquiring corporation, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation for purposes of applying section 1033, relating to involuntary conversions. This rule shall apply even though the property similar or related in service or use to the property converted, or the stock of a corporation owning such similar property, is purchased by the acquiring corporation after the date of distribution or transfer and is not received from the distributor or transferor corporation in the transaction to which section 381(a) applies. Accordingly, if any factor essential to the application of section 1033 occurs on or before the date of distribution or transfer and any other such factor also occurs after that date, then, in accordance with section 381(c)(13) and this section, the provisions of section 1033 shall apply to the acquiring corporation in the same manner that they would have applied to the distributor or transferor corporation in the absence of the distribution or transfer. For purposes of this section, the terms involuntary conversion and disposition of the converted property shall have the meaning ascribed to them by the regulations under section 1033.
(2) Application to other transactions. The provisions of this section shall apply to any transaction which, under provisions of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, is treated as though it were an involuntary conversion within the meaning of section 1033. See, for example, section 1071, relating to gain from a sale or exchange to effectuate the policies of the Federal Communications Commission; and sections 1332(b)(3) and 1333(3), relating to war loss recoveries.
(b) Conversion into similar property. Section 1033(a)(1) provides that no gain shall be recognized if property is involuntarily converted only into property which is similar or related in service or use to the property so converted. If there is a disposition of property of a distributor or transferor corporation and, subsequent to the date of distribution or transfer, property similar or related in service or use to the property disposed of is received by the acquiring corporation as compensation for the property so disposed of, then no gain shall be recognized to the acquiring corporation, provided that no gain would have been recognized under section 1033(a)(1) if the similar property had been received directly by the distributor or transferor corporation.
Example. Property of S Corporation with an adjusted basis of $100 is condemned by the local government. Shortly after the property is so condemned, S Corporation liquidates and distributes its assets to P Corporation in a distribution to which section 381(a) applies. Subsequent to the date of distribution, P Corporation receives from the government (in settlement of the condemnation proceedings) property with a market value of $500 which is similar or related in service or use to the property so condemned. No gain is recognized to either corporation upon P Corporation's receipt of the similar property, and the property so received has a basis of $100 in the hands of P Corporation on the date of its acquisition.
(c) Conversion into money or dissimilar property when disposition occurs after December 31, 1950--(1) General rule. Section 1033(a)(3) and Sec. 1.1033(a)-2 provide rules for involuntary conversions of property into money or dissimilar property where the disposition of the converted property occurs after December 31, 1950. In such a case, the gain on the conversion, if any, shall be recognized, at the election of the taxpayer, only to the extent that the amount realized on the conversion exceeds the cost of other property purchased by the taxpayer which is similar or related in service or use to the property so converted, or exceeds the cost of stock purchased by the taxpayer in the acquisition of control of a corporation owning such other property, provided (i) the taxpayer purchases such other property or stock for the purpose of replacing the property so converted and (ii) the purchase occurs during the period of time specified in section 1033(a)(3)(B). The provisions of this paragraph shall apply to involuntary conversions where the disposition of the property occurs after December 31, 1950, and where the election to have section 1033(a)(3) apply to the treatment of the gain upon the conversion is contingent upon activities of both the distributor or transferor corporation and the acquiring corporation. For purposes of section 381(c)(13), the period of time specified in section 1033(a)(3)(B) shall be determined by taking into account taxable years of, and extensions of time granted to, both the distributor or transferor corporation and the acquiring corporation.
(1) General rule. Section 1033(a)(3) and Sec. 1.1033(a)-2 provide rules for involuntary conversions of property into money or dissimilar property where the disposition of the converted property occurs after December 31, 1950. In such a case, the gain on the conversion, if any, shall be recognized, at the election of the taxpayer, only to the extent that the amount realized on the conversion exceeds the cost of other property purchased by the taxpayer which is similar or related in service or use to the property so converted, or exceeds the cost of stock purchased by the taxpayer in the acquisition of control of a corporation owning such other property, provided (i) the taxpayer purchases such other property or stock for the purpose of replacing the property so converted and (ii) the purchase occurs during the period of time specified in section 1033(a)(3)(B). The provisions of this paragraph shall apply to involuntary conversions where the disposition of the property occurs after December 31, 1950, and where the election to have section 1033(a)(3) apply to the treatment of the gain upon the conversion is contingent upon activities of both the distributor or transferor corporation and the acquiring corporation. For purposes of section 381(c)(13), the period of time specified in section 1033(a)(3)(B) shall be determined by taking into account taxable years of, and extensions of time granted to, both the distributor or transferor corporation and the acquiring corporation.
(2) Replacement period. The period during which the purchase of similar property or stock must be made in order to prevent the recognition of gain on the involuntary conversion terminates 2 years (or, in the case of a disposition occurring before Dec. 31, 1969, 1 year) after the close of the first taxable year in which any part of the gain upon the conversion is realized, or at the close of such later date as may be designated pursuant to an application of the taxpayer. See paragraph (c)(3) of Sec. 1.1033(a)-2. Therefore, if, in a case to which this subparagraph applies, the first taxable year in which gain is realized is the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending with the close of the date of distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation will have a maximum of only 2 years (or, in the case of a disposition occurring before Dec. 31, 1969, 1 year) after that date in which to purchase the similar property or stock, unless an extension of time has been granted upon application by the distributor, transferor, or acquiring corporation within the time prescribed. See paragraph (a) of Sec. 1.381(b)-1 as to the termination of the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation. See paragraph (c)(3) of Sec. 1.1033(a)-2 as to applications to extend the period within which to replace the converted property. In addition to the information otherwise required under paragraph (c)(3) of Sec. 1.1033(a)-2, the application shall contain sufficient detail in connection with the distribution or transfer to establish that section 381(c)(13) applies to the involuntary conversion involved.
(3) Examples. The application of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following examples:
Example 1. A and B Corporations compute their taxable income on the basis of the calendar year, and both corporations use the cash method of accounting. During 1970 property of A Corporation is destroyed by fire, and in January 1971, A Corporation receives $15,000 from an insurance company as compensation for its loss of property. The adjusted basis of the property on the date of destruction is $10,000; as a consequence, A Corporation realizes a gain of $5,000 on the involuntary conversion. On June 30, 1971, B Corporation acquires all of the assets of A Corporation in a reorganization to which section 381(a) applies. In accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of Sec. 1.1033(a)-2, A Corporation reports in its return for the short taxable year ending June 30, 1971, all the details in connection with the involuntary conversion but does not include the realized gain in gross income, thereby electing to have the gain recognized only to the extent provided in section 1033(a)(3). On June 15, 1973, B Corporation purchases for $20,000 property which is similar or related in service or use to the property previously destroyed. In its return for 1973, B Corporation reports all of the details in connection with its replacement of the property, as required by paragraph (c)(2) of Sec. 1.1033(a)-2. As a result of this replacement by B Corporation, none of the gain realized by A Corporation is recognized. The replacement property which is purchased by B Corporation has a basis to that corporation of $15,000 on the date of its purchase, that is, the cost of such property ($20,000) decreased by the amount of gain not recognized to A Corporation on the involuntary conversion ($5,000).
Example 2. Assume the same facts as in Example (1), except that B Corporation does not purchase similar property on or before June 30, 1973, and does not apply on or before that date (in accordance with paragraph (c)(3) of Sec. 1.1033(a)-2) for an extension of time in which to make a replacement. In such event, the gain realized by A Corporation is recognized to that corporation for its taxable year ending June 30, 1971. A Corporation's tax liability for such taxable year must be recomputed in accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of Sec. 1.1033(a)-2 in order to reflect this additional income.
Example 3. Assume the same facts as in Example (1), except that the property of A Corporation is destroyed in 1968, A Corporation receives the $15,000 from an insurance company in January 1969, B Corporation acquires all of the assets of A Corporation on June 30, 1969, and A Corporation's return is filed for the short taxable year ending June 30, 1969. B Corporation would have to purchase property which is similar or related in service or use to the property previously destroyed by June 30, 1970, in order to take advantage of the provisions of section 1033.
Example 4. M and N Corporations compute their taxable income on the basis of the calendar year, and both corporations use the cash method of accounting. During 1970, property of M Corporation is destroyed by fire. The adjusted basis of the property on the date of destruction is $10,000. The property is insured against loss by fire, but the insurance claim is not satisfied on or before June 30, 1971, the date on which N Corporation acquires all of the assets (including the insurance claim) of M Corporation in a reorganization to which section 381(a) applies. On September 1, 1972, N Corporation receives $15,000 from the insurance company as compensation for the fire loss suffered by M Corporation. Upon receipt of the insurance proceeds, N Corporation realizes a gain of $5,000 upon the involuntary conversion; however, in its return for 1972, N Corporation elects under the provisions of paragraph (c)(2) of Sec. 1.1033(a)-2 to have the gain recognized only to the extent provided by section 1033(a)(3). On December 30, 1974, N Corporation purchases for $20,000 property which is similar or related in service or use to the property previously destroyed in the hands of M Corporation. As a result of this replacement by N Corporation, none of the gain realized by N Corporation in 1972 is recognized. The replacement property which is purchased by N Corporation has a basis to that corporation of $15,000 on the date of its purchase, that is, the cost of such property ($20,000) decreased by the amount of gain not recognized to N Corporation on the involuntary conversion ($5,000).
Example 5. R and S Corporations compute their taxable income on the basis of the calendar year, and both corporations use the cash method of accounting. During 1970 property of R Corporation is destroyed by fire. The adjusted basis of the property on the date of destruction is $10,000. In anticipation of taking the benefit of section 1033(a)(3), R Corporation purchases for $20,000 on June 1, 1971, property which is similar or related in service or use to the destroyed property. In its return for 1971, R Corporation reports all of the details in connection with the replacement of the property, as required by paragraph (c)(2) of Sec. 1.1033(a)-2. The property destroyed in 1970 is insured against loss by fire, but the insurance claim is not satisfied on or before March 1, 1972, the date on which S Corporation acquires all of the assets (including the insurance claim) of R Corporation in a reorganization to which section 381(a) applies. On October 1, 1972, S Corporation receives $12,000 from the insurance company as compensation for the fire loss suffered by R Corporation. Upon receipt of the insurance proceeds, S Corporation realizes a gain of $2,000 upon the involuntary conversion; however, in its return for 1972, S Corporation elects under the provisions of paragraph (c)(2) of Sec. 1.1033(a)-2 to have the gain recognized only to the extent provided by section 1033(a)(3). As a result of the replacement by R Corporation, none of the gain realized by S Corporation in 1972 is recognized. Assuming there are no adjustments for depreciation, the replacement property has a basis on October 1, 1972, of $18,000, that is, the cost of such property ($20,000) decreased by the amount of gain not recognized to S Corporation on the involuntary conversion ($2,000)
(d) Conversion into money when disposition occurs before January 1, 1951. Section 1033(a)(2) provides that, if property is disposed of in an involuntary conversion before January 1, 1951, and money is received as compensation for the conversion, no gain shall be recognized if such money is forthwith expended in the acquisition of other property similar or related in service or use to the property so converted, or in the acquisition of control of a corporation owning such other property, or in the establishment of a replacement fund. That section also provides that, if any part of the money is not so expended, the gain, if any, shall be recognized to the extent of the money which is not so expended. For example, if, pursuant to section 381(c)(13) and section 1033(a)(2), property of a distributor or transferor corporation is disposed of before January 1, 1951, in an involuntary conversion, and the proceeds from the conversion are received by the acquiring corporation so that the gain on the conversion is realized by that corporation, the acquiring corporation may avoid recognition of the gain if it complies with the provisions of section 1033(a)(2) for nonrecognition of gain. Thus, the acquiring corporation must forthwith expend the proceeds in the acquisition of similar property or stock, or in the establishment of a replacement fund, in order to avoid recognition of the gain, if the disposition occurred before January 1, 1951. See the provisions of Sec. Sec. 1.1033(a)-3 and 1.1033(a)-4 relating to involuntary conversions and replacement funds when disposition of the converted property occurred before January 1, 1951.
(e) Successive acquiring corporations. An acquiring corporation which, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, acquires the assets of a corporation which previously acquired the assets of another corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, shall be treated as such other corporation for purposes of applying sections 381(c)(13) and 1033 (relating to involuntary conversions). Thus, for example, if any factor essential to the application of section 1033 occurs on or before the date of distribution or transfer in one transaction to which section 381(a) applies, and any other such factor occurs after the date of distribution or transfer in a subsequent transaction to which section 381(a) applies, then the acquiring corporation in such subsequent transaction shall be treated as the first distributor or transferor corporation subject to the rules and limitations of this section for purposes of sections 381(c)(13) and 1033. [T.D. 6552, 26 FR 1989, Mar. 8, 1961, as amended by T.D. 7075, 35 FR 17995, Nov. 24, 1970] Sec. 1.381(c)(14)-1 Dividend carryover to personal holding company.
(a) Carryover requirement. Section 381(c)(14) provides that an acquiring corporation shall succeed to and take into account the dividend carryover (described in section 564) of a distributor or transferor corporation in computing its dividends paid deduction under section 561 for taxable years ending after the date of distribution or transfer for which the acquiring corporation is a personal holding company under section 542. To determine the amount of such dividend carryover and to integrate it with the dividend carryover of the acquiring corporation in computing the dividends paid deduction for taxable years ending after the date of distribution or transfer, it is necessary to apply the provisions of section 564 and Sec. 1.564-1 in accordance with this section.
(b) Manner of computing dividend carryover--(1) Preceding taxable years. If the acquiring corporation is a personal holding company under section 542 for its first taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer, the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending with such date is a first preceding taxable year for purposes of section 564, and the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation immediately preceding such first preceding year is a second preceding taxable year for purposes of section 564. If the acquiring corporation is a personal holding company for its second taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer, the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending with such date is a second preceding taxable year for purposes of section 564.
(1) Preceding taxable years. If the acquiring corporation is a personal holding company under section 542 for its first taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer, the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending with such date is a first preceding taxable year for purposes of section 564, and the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation immediately preceding such first preceding year is a second preceding taxable year for purposes of section 564. If the acquiring corporation is a personal holding company for its second taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer, the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending with such date is a second preceding taxable year for purposes of section 564.
(2) Determination of dividends paid deduction and taxable income. The dividends paid deduction of any distributor or transferor corporation (determined under section 561 but without regard to any dividend carryover) and the taxable income of any such corporation (adjusted as provided in section 545(b)) for any taxable year ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer shall be determined without reference to any dividends paid deduction, or taxable income, of the acquiring corporation or any other distributor or transferor corporation; in like manner, the dividends paid deduction and the taxable income of the acquiring corporation for any such taxable year shall be determined without reference to any dividends paid deduction, or taxable income, of a distributor or transferor corporation.
(3) Computation of dividend carryover. (i) For the purpose of determining the dividend carryover to the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after the date of distribution or transfer, the amount of the dividend carryover from the distributor or transferor corporation shall be determined under section 564 without reference to the dividends paid deduction or taxable income of the acquiring corporation or any other corporation. If two or more transactions to which section 381(a) applies have the same date of distribution or transfer, or if a particular taxable year of the acquiring corporation is the first taxable year ending after the dates of distribution or transfer of two or more such transactions occurring on different dates, the amount of the dividend carryover from each distributor or transferor corporation shall be determined separately as provided in the preceding sentence. Except as provided in subdivision (iii) of this subparagraph, the aggregate of the dividend carryovers from each distributor or transferor corporation and the dividend carryover of the acquiring corporation (computed without regard to this section) shall constitute the dividend carryover under section 561(a)(3) of the acquiring corporation for its first taxable year ending after the date (or dates) of distribution or transfer.
(i) For the purpose of determining the dividend carryover to the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after the date of distribution or transfer, the amount of the dividend carryover from the distributor or transferor corporation shall be determined under section 564 without reference to the dividends paid deduction or taxable income of the acquiring corporation or any other corporation. If two or more transactions to which section 381(a) applies have the same date of distribution or transfer, or if a particular taxable year of the acquiring corporation is the first taxable year ending after the dates of distribution or transfer of two or more such transactions occurring on different dates, the amount of the dividend carryover from each distributor or transferor corporation shall be determined separately as provided in the preceding sentence. Except as provided in subdivision (iii) of this subparagraph, the aggregate of the dividend carryovers from each distributor or transferor corporation and the dividend carryover of the acquiring corporation (computed without regard to this section) shall constitute the dividend carryover under section 561(a)(3) of the acquiring corporation for its first taxable year ending after the date (or dates) of distribution or transfer.
(ii) For the purpose of determining the dividend carryover to the second taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after the date (or dates) of distribution or transfer, the excess, if any, of the dividends paid deduction (determined under section 561 without regard to any dividend carryover) over the taxable income (adjusted as provided in section 545(b)) for the taxable year of each distributor or transferor corporation and the acquiring corporation referred to as a second preceding taxable year shall be determined separately without reference to the dividends paid deduction or taxable income of any other of such corporations. The excesses thus determined shall be aggregated, and such aggregate shall be--
(a) Increased by the excess of the dividends paid deduction (determined without regard to any dividend carryover) over the taxable income (adjusted as provided in section 545(b)), or
(b) Reduced by the excess of the taxable income (adjusted as provided in section 545(b)) over the dividends paid deduction (determined without regard to any dividend carryover), for the first preceding taxable year of the acquiring corporation. Except as provided in subdivision (iii) of this subparagraph, the amount thus determined shall constitute the dividend carryover under section 561(a)(3) of the acquiring corporation for its second taxable year ending after the date (or dates) of distribution or transfer.
(iii) If a particular taxable year of the acquiring corporation is its first taxable year ending after the date (or dates) of distribution or transfer of one or more transactions to which section 381(a) applies, and if the same taxable year of the acquiring corporation is also its second taxable year ending after the date (or dates) of distribution or transfer of one or more other transactions to which section 381(a) applies, then, for the purpose of determining the dividend carryover to such taxable year of the acquiring corporation, the rules contained in both subdivisions (i) and (ii) of this subparagraph shall be applied. Insofar as such taxable year constitutes the first taxable year ending after the date (or dates) of distribution or transfer of any transaction, the amount of the dividend carryover from any distributor or transferor corporation involved in such transaction shall be determined separately as provided in subdivision (i) of this subparagraph. Insofar as such taxable year constitutes the second taxable year ending after the date (or dates) of distribution or transfer of any transaction, the amount of the dividend carryover from any distributor or transferor corporation involved in the transaction and the acquiring corporation shall be determined as provided in subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph. The aggregate of the dividend carryovers thus determined shall constitute the dividend carryover under section 561(a)(3) of the acquiring corporation for such taxable year. See Example (4) in paragraph (c) of this section.
(c) Illustrations. The rules set forth in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section may be illustrated by the following examples:
(i) Facts. N Corporation acquired on June 30, 1960, all the assets of M Corporation in a reorganization to which section 381(a) applies. Both corporations compute taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. N Corporation is a personal holding company for its taxable years ending December 31, 1960, and December 31, 1961.
(ii) Dividend carryover to N Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1960. With respect to N Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1960, the taxable years referred to as first preceding taxable years and second preceding taxable years are--
(a) M Corporation's taxable years ending June 30, 1960, and December 31, 1959, respectively; and
(b) N Corporation's taxable years ending December 31, 1959, and December 31, 1958, respectively. The dividend carryover to N Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1960, is $22,000 computed as follows, assuming the dividends paid deduction before dividend carryovers, and the taxable income after section 545(b) adjustments, to be as stated in the computation:
M Corporation N CorporationSecond preceding taxable year:
Dividends paid deduction.................................. $25,000 ........... $12,000
Taxable income............................................ 15,000 ........... 13,000
============= -------------
Excess dividends paid deduction........................................ $10,000
First preceding taxable year:
Dividends paid deduction.................................. 23,000 ........... 20,000
Taxable income............................................ 21,000 ........... 10,000
============= -------------
Excess dividends paid deduction........................... 2,000 ........... $10,000Separate dividend carryovers................................ 12,000 ........... 10,000---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The aggregate dividend carryover of $22,000 is the sum of $12,000 (the separate dividend carryover from M Corporation) and $10,000 (the separate dividend carryover from N Corporation's own preceding taxable years).
(iii) Dividend carryover to N Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1961. With respect to N Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1961, the first preceding taxable year is N Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1960; and the taxable years referred to as second preceding taxable years are M Corporation's taxable year ending June 30, 1960, and N Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1959. The dividend carryover to N Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1961, is $17,000 computed as follows, assuming the dividends paid deduction before dividend carryovers, and the taxable income after section 545(b) adjustments, to be as stated in the computation: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
M N
Second preceding taxable year Corporation Corporation------------------------------------------------------------------------Dividends paid deduction...................... $23,000 $20,000Taxable income................................ 21,000 10,000
-------------------------Separate excess of dividends paid deduction 2,000 10,000
over taxable income..........................------------------------------------------------------------------------ The aggregate excess of dividends paid deduction over taxable income for the second preceding taxable year is $12,000, the sum of $2,000 (separate excess from N Corporation) and $10,000 (separate excess from N Corporation). Such aggregate excess is increased by the excess dividends paid deduction, or is reduced by the excess of taxable income, for the first preceding taxable year as follows: Aggregate excess of dividends paid deduction for .......... $12,000
second preceding taxable year..................Dividends paid deduction of N Corporation for $50,000
first preceding taxable year...................Taxable income of N Corporation for first 45,000
preceding taxable year.........................
------------
.......... $5,000Dividend carryover to N Corporation's taxable .......... 17,000
year ending December 31, 1961..................------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i) Facts. X Corporation is organized on May 1, 1956, and computes its taxable income on the basis of the fiscal year ending April 30. Y Corporation and Z Corporation are both organized on January 1, 1955, and both compute their taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. On July 31, 1957, X Corporation and Y Corporation transfer all their assets to Z Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 381(a) applies. For its taxable years ending December 31, 1957, and December 31, 1958, Z Corporation is a personal holding company.
(ii) Dividend carryover to Z Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1957. With respect to Z Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1957, the taxable years referred to as first preceding taxable years and second preceding taxable years are--
(a) X Corporation's taxable years ending July 31, 1957, and April 30, 1957, respectively;
(b) Y Corporation's taxable years ending July 31, 1957, and December 31, 1956, respectively; and
(c) Z Corporation's taxable years ending December 31, 1956, and December 31, 1955, respectively. The dividend carryover to Z Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1957, is $40,000 computed as follows, assuming the dividends paid deduction before dividend carryovers, and the taxable income after section 545(b) adjustments, to be as stated in the computation:
X Corporation Y Corporation Z CorporationSecond preceding taxable year:
Dividends paid deduction........ $56,000 ........... $19,000 ........... $6,000
Taxable income.................. 24,000 ........... 17,000 ........... 5,000 ...........
------------- ------------- -------------
Excess..................................... $32,000 ........... $2,000 ........... $1,000First preceding taxable year:
Dividends paid deduction........ 9,000 ........... 4,000 ........... 10,000
Taxable income.................. 7,000 ........... 8,000 ........... 5,000
------------- ------------- -------------
Excess..................................... 2,000 ........... (4,000) ........... 5,000
------------- ------------- --------------Separate dividend carryovers................... 34,000 ........... 0 ........... 6,000----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The aggregate dividend carryover of $40,000 is the sum of $34,000 (the separate dividend carryover from X
Corporation) and $6,000 (the separate dividend carryover from Z Corporation's own preceding taxable years).
(iii) Dividend carryover to Z Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1958. With respect to Z Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1958, the first preceding taxable year is Z Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1957; and the taxable years referred to as second preceding taxable years are X Corporation's taxable year ending July 31, 1957, Y Corporation's taxable year ending July 31, 1957, and Z Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1956. The dividend carryover to Z Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1958, is $1,000 computed as follows, assuming the dividends paid deduction before dividend carryovers, and the taxable income after section 545(b) adjustments, to be as stated in the computation: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
X Y Z
Corporation Corporation Corporation------------------------------------------------------------------------Second preceding taxable year:
Dividends paid deduction....... $9,000 $4,000 $10,000
Taxable income................. 7,000 8,000 5,000
--------------------------------------Separate excess of dividends paid 2,000 0 5,000
deduction over taxable income...
------------------------------------------------------------------------ The aggregate excess of dividends paid deduction over taxable income for the second preceding taxable year is $7,000, the sum of $2,000 (separate excess from X Corporation) and $5,000 (separate excess from Z Corporation). Such aggregate excess is increased by the excess dividends paid deduction, or is reduced by the excess of taxable income, for the first preceding taxable year as follows: Aggregate excess of dividends paid deduction for .......... $7,000
second preceding taxable year.....................Dividends paid deduction of Z Corporation for first $102,000
preceding taxable year............................Taxable income of Z Corporation for first preceding 108,000 (6,000)
taxable year......................................
--------------------Dividend carryover to Z Corporation's taxable year .......... 1,000
ending December 31, 1958..........................
Example 3. Assume the facts stated in Example (2), except that Y Corporation transferred all its assets to Z Corporation on May 31, 1957. Assume also that the facts for Y Corporation's taxable year ending May 31, 1957, are otherwise the same as those stated for its taxable year in Example (2) ending July 31, 1957. In such case, the dividend carryovers to Z Corporation's taxable years ending on December 31, 1957, and December 31, 1958, are the same as in Example (2) notwithstanding the fact that the transfers from X Corporation and Y Corporation occurred on the different dates.
(i) Facts. T Corporation acquired on June 30, 1960, all the assets of U Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 381(a) applies, and in a like transaction acquired on June 30, 1961, all the assets of V Corporation. Such corporations all compute taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. T Corporation is a personal holding company for its taxable years 1960 and 1961.
(ii) Dividend carryover to T Corporation's taxable year 1960. With respect to T Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1960, the taxable years referred to as first preceding taxable years and second preceding taxable years are--
(a) U Corporation's taxable years ending June 30, 1960, and December 31, 1959, respectively; and
(b) T Corporation's taxable years ending December 31, 1959, and December 31, 1958, respectively. The dividend carryover to T Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1960, is $7,000 computed as follows, assuming the dividends paid deduction before dividend carryovers, and the taxable income after section 545(b) adjustments, to be as stated in the computation:
U Corporation T CorporationSecond preceding taxable year:
Dividends paid deduction.................................. $16,000 ........... $10,000
Taxable income............................................ 12,000 ........... 13,000
------------- -------------
Excess............................................................... $4,000 ........... 0First preceding taxable year:
Dividends paid deduction.................................. 7,000 ........... 17,000
Taxable income............................................ 5,000 ........... 16,000
------------- -------------
Excess............................................................... 2,000 ........... $1,000
------------- --------------Separate dividend carryovers............................................. 6,000 ........... 1,000---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- The aggregate dividend carryover of $7,000 is the sum of $6,000 (the separate dividend carryover from U Corporation) and $1,000 (the separate dividend carryover from T Corporation's own first preceding taxable year).
(iii) Dividend carryover to T Corporation's taxable year 1961. Inasmuch as T Corporation's taxable year 1961 is the second taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer from U Corporation, paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section governs the determination of the dividend carryover from taxable years of T Corporation and U Corporation. On the other hand, inasmuch as T Corporation's taxable year 1961 is the first taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer from V Corporation, paragraph (b)(3)(i) governs the determination of the dividend carryover from taxable years of V Corporation.
(a) Application of paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section. With respect to T Corporation's taxable year 1961, the first preceding taxable year is T Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1960; and the taxable years referred to as second preceding taxable year are T Corporation's taxable year ending December 31, 1959, and U Corporation's taxable year ending June 30, 1960. The dividend carryover from taxable years of T Corporation and U Corporation is $1,500 computed as follows, assuming the dividends paid deduction before dividend carryovers, and the taxable income after section 545(b) adjustments, to be as stated in the computation: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
U T
Second preceding taxable year Corporation Corporation------------------------------------------------------------------------Dividends paid deduction...................... $7,000 $17,000Taxable income................................ 5,000 16,000
-------------------------Separate excess of dividends paid deduction 2,000 1,000
over taxable income..........................------------------------------------------------------------------------ The aggregate excess of dividends paid deduction over taxable income for the second preceding taxable year is $3,000, the sum of $2,000 (separate excess from U Corporation) and $1,000 (separate excess from T Corporation). Such aggregate is increased by the excess dividends paid deduction, or is reduced by the excess of taxable income, for the first preceding taxable year as follows:
T
Corporation
Aggregate excess of dividends paid deduction for second $3,000
preceding taxable year....................................First preceding taxable year:
Dividends paid deduction of T Corporation.... $21,000
Taxable income of T Corporation.............. 22,500
Excess taxable income.................................... (1,500)
-------------Separate dividend carryover (without regard to V 1,500
Corporation)..............................................
(b) Application of paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section. With respect to T Corporation's taxable year 1961, V Corporation's taxable year ending June 30, 1961, is a first preceding taxable year, and its taxable year ending December 31, 1960, is a second preceding taxable year. The separate dividend carryover from V Corporation is $8,000 computed as follows, assuming the dividends paid deduction before dividend carryovers, and the taxable income after section 545(b) adjustments, to be as stated in the computation:
V Corporation
Second preceding taxable year
Dividends paid deduction......................... $11,000Taxable income................................... 6,000
Excess......................................... .......... $5,000First preceding taxable year:
Dividends paid deduction....................... $9,000
Taxable income................................. 6,000
------------
Excess......................................... 3,000
----------Separate dividend carryover from V Corporation... .......... 8,000
(c) Dividend carryover. The dividend carryover to T Corporation's taxable year 1961 is $9,500, the sum of $8,000 (the separate dividend carryover from V Corporation) and $1,500 (the aggregate dividend carryover from T Corporation and U Corporation).
(d) Successive carryovers. The provisions of this section shall apply for the purpose of determining a dividend carryover to an acquiring corporation which, in a distribution or transfer to which section 381(a) applies, acquires the assets of a distributor or transferor corporation which has previously acquired the assets of another corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies; even though, in computing the dividend carryover to such second acquiring corporation, it is necessary to take into account the deduction for dividends paid, and the adjusted taxable income, of the first distributor or transferor corporation.
(e) Acquiring corporation not receiving all the assets. The dividend carryover acquired from a distributor or transferor corporation by an acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies is not reduced by reason of the fact that the acquiring corporation does not acquire 100 percent of the assets of the distributor or transferor corporation.
(f) Dividends paid after the close of taxable year. A transaction to which section 381(a) applies does not prevent the application of section 563(b) to a dividend paid by a distributor or transferor corporation after the close of its taxable year ending with the date of distribution or transfer but on or before the 15th day of the third month following the close of such taxable year. However, dividends paid by the acquiring corporation may not be taken into account under section 563(b) for the purpose of determining the dividends paid deduction of the distributor or transferor corporation for its taxable year ending with the date of distribution or transfer. [T.D. 6532, 26 FR 406, Jan. 19, 1961] Sec. 1.381(c)(15)-1 Indebtedness of certain personal holding companies.
(a) Qualified indebtedness--(1) Carryover requirement. If, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation assumes liability for any indebtedness which was qualified indebtedness (as defined in section 545(c) and Sec. 1.545-3) in the hands of the distributor or transferor corporation immediately before the assumption of such indebtedness, then, under section 381(c)(15), in computing its undistributed personal holding company income for any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1963, and ending after the date of distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation shall be considered the distributor or transferor corporation for purposes of computing the deduction under section 545(c) and Sec. 1.545-3. Such deduction shall be allowed to the acquiring corporation in accordance with section 545(c) and Sec. 1.545-3.
(1) Carryover requirement. If, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation assumes liability for any indebtedness which was qualified indebtedness (as defined in section 545(c) and Sec. 1.545-3) in the hands of the distributor or transferor corporation immediately before the assumption of such indebtedness, then, under section 381(c)(15), in computing its undistributed personal holding company income for any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1963, and ending after the date of distribution or transfer, the acquiring corporation shall be considered the distributor or transferor corporation for purposes of computing the deduction under section 545(c) and Sec. 1.545-3. Such deduction shall be allowed to the acquiring corporation in accordance with section 545(c) and Sec. 1.545-3.
(2) Successive transactions to which section 381(a) applies. If in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, an acquiring corporation assumes liability for qualified indebtedness, such acquiring corporation shall be deemed to have incurred such qualified indebtedness for the purpose of applying section 381(c)(15) to any subsequent transaction in which such acquiring corporation is the distributor or transferor corporation.
(b) Pre-1934 indebtedness--(1) Carryover requirement. If, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation assumes liability for any indebtedness incurred, or assumed, before January 1, 1934, by a distributor or transferor corporation, then under section 381(c)(15) the acquiring corporation shall be allowed, in computing its undistributed personal holding company income for any taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer, a deduction under section 545(b)(7) for amounts used or irrevocably set aside to pay or to retire such indebtedness. Such deduction shall be allowed to the acquiring corporation in accordance with section 545(b)(7) and paragraph (g) of Sec. 1.545-2 as though the indebtedness had been incurred, or assumed, by the acquiring corporation before January 1, 1934.
(1) Carryover requirement. If, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation assumes liability for any indebtedness incurred, or assumed, before January 1, 1934, by a distributor or transferor corporation, then under section 381(c)(15) the acquiring corporation shall be allowed, in computing its undistributed personal holding company income for any taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer, a deduction under section 545(b)(7) for amounts used or irrevocably set aside to pay or to retire such indebtedness. Such deduction shall be allowed to the acquiring corporation in accordance with section 545(b)(7) and paragraph (g) of Sec. 1.545-2 as though the indebtedness had been incurred, or assumed, by the acquiring corporation before January 1, 1934.
(2) Successive transactions to which section 381(a) applies. If, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, an acquiring corporation assumes liability for indebtedness described in subparagraph (1) of this paragraph, such acquiring corporation shall be deemed to have incurred the indebtedness before January 1, 1934, for the purpose of applying section 381(c)(15) to any subsequent transaction in which such acquiring corporation is the distributor or transferor corporation.
(c) Special rule. For purposes of this section, if, in a transaction otherwise described in this section, an acquiring corporation acquires real estate--(1) of which the distributor or transferor corporation is the legal or equitable owner immediately before the acquisition, and (2) which is subject to indebtedness that, with respect to the distributor or transferor corporation, is indebtedness described in this section immediately before the acquisition, then the acquiring corporation will be treated as having assumed such indebtedness, provided it shows to the satisfaction of the Commissioner that under all the facts and circumstances it bears the burden of discharging such indebtedness. [T.D. 6949, 33 FR 5524, Apr. 9, 1968; 33 FR 6091, Apr. 20, 1968] Sec. 1.381(c)(16)-1 Obligations of distributor or transferor corporation.
(a) Deduction allowed to acquiring corporation. (1) If, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation assumes an obligation of a distributor or transferor corporation which gives rise to a liability after the date of distribution or transfer and if the distributor or transferor corporation would be entitled to deduct such liability in computing taxable income were it paid or accrued after that date by such corporation, then, under the provisions of section 381(c)(16) and this section, the acquiring corporation shall be entitled to deduct such liability as if it were the distributor or transferor corporation. However, in the case of a transaction to which section 381(a)(2) applies, section 381(c)(16) shall not apply to an obligation which is reflected in the amount of consideration, that is, the stock, securities, or other property, transferred by the acquiring corporation to a transferor corporation or its shareholders in exchange for the property of that transferor corporation. An obligation which is so reflected in the amount of consideration will be treated as an item or tax attribute not specified in section 381(c)(16). Such an obligation is subject to section 381(c)(4). See subparagraph (2) of this paragraph. Any deduction allowed under section 381(c)(16) to the acquiring corporation shall be taken by that corporation in the taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer in which the liability is paid or accrued by that corporation, as the case may be.
(1) If, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation assumes an obligation of a distributor or transferor corporation which gives rise to a liability after the date of distribution or transfer and if the distributor or transferor corporation would be entitled to deduct such liability in computing taxable income were it paid or accrued after that date by such corporation, then, under the provisions of section 381(c)(16) and this section, the acquiring corporation shall be entitled to deduct such liability as if it were the distributor or transferor corporation. However, in the case of a transaction to which section 381(a)(2) applies, section 381(c)(16) shall not apply to an obligation which is reflected in the amount of consideration, that is, the stock, securities, or other property, transferred by the acquiring corporation to a transferor corporation or its shareholders in exchange for the property of that transferor corporation. An obligation which is so reflected in the amount of consideration will be treated as an item or tax attribute not specified in section 381(c)(16). Such an obligation is subject to section 381(c)(4). See subparagraph (2) of this paragraph. Any deduction allowed under section 381(c)(16) to the acquiring corporation shall be taken by that corporation in the taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer in which the liability is paid or accrued by that corporation, as the case may be.
(2) In order to determine whether, in the case of obligations of a distributor or transferor corporation assumed by an acquiring corporation, section 381(c)(16) and this section, or section 381(c)(4) and the regulations thereunder, apply, the following rules shall govern:
(i) If the obligation gave rise to a liability before the date of distribution or transfer, see section 381(c)(4) and the regulations thereunder.
(ii) If the obligation gives rise to a liability after the date of distribution or transfer, and the obligation was not reflected in the amount of consideration transferred by the acquiring corporation to the distributor or transferor corporation or its shareholders in exchange for the property of the distributor or transferor corporation, then section 381(c)(16) and this section shall apply.
(iii) In the case of a transaction to which section 381(a)(1) applies, if the obligation gives rise to a liability after the date of a distribution, and the obligation was reflected in the amount of consideration transferred by the acquiring corporation to the distributor corporation or its shareholders in exchange for the property of the distributor corporation, then section 381(c)(16) and this section shall apply.
(iv) In the case of a transaction to which section 381(a)(2) applies, if the obligation gives rise to a liability after the date of a transfer, and the obligation was reflected in the amount of consideration transferred by the acquiring corporation to the transferor corporation or its shareholders in exchange for the property of the transferor corporation, then see section 381(c)(4) and the regulations thereunder.
(3) The rules of this section apply to obligations assumed by agreement of the parties as well as by operation of law.
(4) For purposes of this section, an obligation of a distributor or transferor corporation gives rise to a liability when the liability would be accruable by a taxpayer using the accrual method of accounting notwithstanding the fact that the distributor or transferor corporation is not using the accrual method of accounting. See paragraph (a)(2) of Sec. 1.461-1.
(5) In the case of a transaction to which section 381(a)(2) applies, the determination as to whether or not an obligation was reflected in the amount of consideration transferred by the acquiring corporation to the transferor corporation or its shareholders in exchange for the property of the transferor corporation shall be made on the basis of all the facts of each particular transfer. Where, on the date of distribution or transfer, the parties were aware of the existence of a specific obligation and reduced the amount of consideration to be transferred by the acquiring corporation by a specific amount because of the existence of such obligation, then such obligation shall be considered to have been reflected in the amount of consideration transferred. In the absence of such facts, it shall be presumed that the obligation was not reflected in the amount of consideration transferred.
(b) Distribution or transfer occurring under the Internal Revenue Code of 1939. Subject to the provisions of section 381(c)(16) and this section, a corporation which would have been an acquiring corporation (under the provisions of paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.381(a)-1) in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies if the date of distribution or transfer had occurred on or after the effective date of the provisions of subchapter C, chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, applicable to a liquidation or reorganization, as the case may be, shall be entitled to take a deduction for amounts paid or accrued in any taxable year beginning after December 31, 1953, in respect of any obligation which it has assumed from a corporation which would have been a distributor or transferor corporation in such transaction. However, this paragraph shall have no application to a situation described in paragraph (a)(2)(iv) of this section.
(c) Examples. The application of the foregoing rules may be illustrated by the following examples:
Example 1. X Corporation and Y Corporation compute their taxable income on the basis of the calendar year, and both corporations use an accrual method of accounting. On December 31, 1954, Y Corporation acquires the assets of X Corporation in a transfer to which section 381(a)(2) applies. By reason of State law, Y Corporation assumes responsibility for all of the obligations for which X Corporation is then, or may become, liable. The parties have no knowledge of any specific obligations of X Corporation which are not yet fixed and ascertainable, but it is agreed to reduce the amount of consideration that Y Corporation is to transfer in exchange for the assets of X Corporation by $5,000 to reflect any unforeseen contingent liabilities of X Corporation for which Y Corporation might subsequently become liable. After the date of the transfer, a claim for damages on account of the alleged negligence of an alleged agent of X Corporation is filed. After commencement of legal action by the claimant and in order to eliminate the possibility of injury to its business, Y Corporation settles the claim in 1955 by paying the claimant the amount of $3,000. Assuming that such sum would have been deductible under section 162 if paid by X Corporation, Y Corporation is entitled to deduct such sum in accordance with the provisions of section 381(c)(16) and this section in computing its taxable income for 1955, since the claim gave rise to a liability after the date of transfer, the parties were not aware of a specific obligation, and the specific obligation was not reflected in the consideration transferred by Y Corporation in exchange for the assets of X Corporation.
Example 2. Assume the same facts as in Example (1), except that the claim for damages was filed prior to the transfer of X Corporation's assets to Y Corporation, but the parties considered the chances for recovery by the claimant so remote that no specific amount other than the $5,000 reduction in consideration for all contingent liabilities as a whole is reflected in the consideration transferred by Y Corporation in exchange for the assets of X Corporation. Assuming that such sum would have been deductible under section 162 if paid by X Corporation, the $3,000 paid by Y Corporation in 1955 is deductible in accordance with the provisions of section 381(c)(16) and this section in 1955.
Example 3. Assume the same facts as in Example (1), except that the parties consider the chances of recovery by the claimant of sufficient probability that Y Corporation reduces the amount of consideration it transfers in exchange for the assets of X Corporation by $1,000 in addition to the $5,000 reduction for all other contingent liabilities. The $3,000 paid by Y Corporation in 1955 is not deductible under section 381(c)(16) and this section, since the specific obligation was reflected in the consideration transferred by Y Corporation in exchange for the assets of X Corporation. The deductibility of the payment is accordingly governed by the provisions of section 381(c)(4) and the regulations thereunder. Similarly, if in this case Y Corporation had transferred $10,000 less in consideration for the assets of X Corporation because of this particular claim, Y Corporation would not be entitled to any deduction for the $3,000 paid in 1955 under section 381(c)(16) and this section, and the deductibility of the payment would be governed by the provisions of section 381(c)(4) and the regulations thereunder. If the date of transfer of X Corporation's assets had occurred prior to the effective date of subchapter C, chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code of 1954, applicable to a reorganization, no deduction would be allowed to Y Corporation under that section. [T.D. 6750, 29 FR 11267, Aug. 5, 1964] Sec. 1.381(c)(17)-1 Deficiency dividend of personal holding company.
(a) Carryover requirement. If a determination (as defined in section 547(c)) establishes that a distributor or transferor corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies is liable for personal holding company tax imposed by section 541 (or by a corresponding provision of prior income tax law) for any taxable year ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer, then in computing such tax the deduction described in section 547 shall be allowed pursuant to section 381(c)(17) to such corporation for the amount of deficiency dividends paid by the acquiring corporation with respect to the distributor or transferor corporation. Except as otherwise provided in this section, the provisions of section 547 and the regulations thereunder apply with respect to a deficiency dividend deduction allowable pursuant to section 381(c)(17).
(b) Deficiency dividends paid by the acquiring corporation with respect to the distributor or transferor corporation. A deficiency dividend paid by the acquiring corporation with respect to the distributor or transferor corporation is a distribution that would satisfy the definition of a deficiency dividend under section 547(d)(1) if paid by the distributor or transferor corporation to its own shareholders except that it shall be paid by the acquiring corporation to its own shareholders and shall be paid after the date of distribution or transfer and on, or within 90 days after, the date of the determination but before the acquiring corporation files claim under paragraph (c) of this section.
(c) Claim for deduction. A claim for a deduction under this section shall be made by the acquiring corporation on Form 976, and shall be filed within 120 days after the date of the determination. The form shall contain, or be accompanied by, the information required under paragraph (b)(2) of Sec. 1.547-2 in sufficient detail to properly identify the facts with the distributor or transferor corporation and the acquiring corporation. The statement required with respect to the shareholders on the date of payment of the deficiency dividend shall relate to the shareholders of the acquiring corporation, and the required certified copy of the resolution authorizing the payment of the dividend shall be that of the board of directors, or other authority, of the acquiring corporation. Necessary changes may be made in Form 976 in order to carry out the provisions of this paragraph. The claim shall be filed with the district director for the internal revenue district in which the return of the distributor or transferor corporation to which such claim relates was filed.
(d) Effect on dividends paid deduction. A deficiency dividend paid by the acquiring corporation, which is allowable as a deduction to a distributor or transferor corporation pursuant to section 381(c)(17), shall not become a part of the dividends paid deduction of the acquiring corporation under section 561 for any taxable year.
(e) Successive transactions to which section 381(a) applies. The provisions of this section shall apply in the case of successive transactions to which section 381(a) applies. Thus, if X Corporation transfers its assets to Y Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies and if Y Corporation transfers its assets to Z Corporation in a subsequent transaction to which section 381(a) applies, then, subject to the provisions of this section, X Corporation may take a deficiency dividend deduction for the amount of deficiency dividends paid by Z Corporation with respect to X Corporation.
(f) Example. The provisions of this section may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. M Corporation, a personal holding company, computes its taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. On December 31, 1956, N Corporation acquires the assets of M Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. On July 31, 1958, a determination (as defined in section 547(c)) establishes that M Corporation is liable for the taxable year 1955 for personal holding company tax in the amount of $35,500 based on undistributed personal holding company income of $42,000 for such taxable year. N Corporation complies with the provisions of this section and on September 30, 1958, distributes $42,000 to its shareholders as deficiency dividends with respect to M Corporation's taxable year 1955. The distribution of $42,000 by N Corporation is a taxable dividend under section 316(b)(2) regardless of whether N Corporation is a personal holding company for the taxable year 1958 or whether it had any current or accumulated earnings and profits. See Example (3) in paragraph (e) of Sec. 1.316-1. Because N Corporation has paid deficiency dividends of $42,000 in accordance with this section, M Corporation is entitled to a deficiency dividend deduction of $42,000 for the taxable year 1955 and is thus relieved of its liability for personal holding company tax of $35,500 for such taxable year. To prevent a duplication of deductions, the amount distributed by N Corporation in 1958 does not become a part of N Corporation's dividends paid deduction under section 561 for any taxable year. [T.D. 6532, 26 FR 409, Jan. 19, 1961, as amended by T.D. 7604, 44 FR 18661, Mar. 29, 1979; T.D. 7767, 45 FR 11264, Feb. 6, 1981] Sec. 1.381(c)(18)-1 Depletion on extraction of ores or minerals from the waste or residue of prior mining.
(a) Carryover requirement. Section 381(c)(18) provides that the acquiring corporation in a transaction described in section 381(a) shall be considered as though it were the distributor or transferor corporation after the date of distribution or transfer for the purpose of determining the applicability of section 613(c)(3) (relating to extraction of ores or minerals from the ground). Thus, an acquiring corporation which has acquired the waste or residue of prior mining from a distributor or transferor corporation in a transaction described in section 381(a) shall be entitled, after the date of distribution or transfer, to an allowance for depletion under section 611 in respect of ores or minerals extracted from such waste or residue if the distributor or transferor corporation would have been entitled to such an allowance for depletion in the absence of the distribution or transfer. See paragraph (f) of Sec. 1.613-4 to determine whether a distributor or transferor corporation is entitled to an allowance for depletion with respect to the waste or residue of prior mining.
(b) Application of section 614 to waste or residue of prior mining. If, in a transaction described in section 381(a), the acquiring corporation acquires waste or residue of prior mining from a distributor or transferor corporation, then the acquiring corporation shall be considered as though it were the distributor or transferor corporation for the purpose of applying section 614 and the regulations thereunder to the waste or residue so acquired. Thus, if the distributor or transferor corporation was required under paragraph (c) of Sec. 1.614-1 to treat the waste or residue as part of the mineral deposit from which it was extracted and if the acquiring corporation acquires both the waste or residue and the mineral deposit from which it was extracted in a transaction described in section 381(a), then such waste or residue shall be treated as a part of such mineral deposit in the hands of the acquiring corporation. On the other hand, if the waste or residue was required to be treated as a separate mineral deposit in the hands of the distributor or transferor corporation, such waste or residue shall be treated as a separate mineral deposit in the hands of the acquiring corporation. [T.D. 6552, 26 FR 1991, Mar. 8, 1961, as amended by T.D. 7170, 37 FR 5373, Mar. 15, 1972] Sec. 1.381(c)(19)-1 Charitable contribution carryovers in certain acquisitions.
(a) Carryover requirement. Section 381(c)(19) provides that, in computing taxable income for its taxable years which begin after the date of distribution or transfer to which section 381(a) applies, the acquiring corporation shall take into account any charitable contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation during the taxable year ending on the date of distribution or transfer, and in certain immediately preceding taxable years, which are in excess of the maximum amount deductible for those taxable years under section 170(b)(2) in the following manner:
(1) If the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending on the date of distribution or transfer begins before January 1, 1962, the acquiring corporation shall, in computing taxable income for its first 2 taxable years which begin after the date of such distribution or transfer, take into account the excess contributions made by the distributor or transferor corporation in the taxable year ending on the date of distribution or transfer and in the immediately preceding taxable year;
(2) If the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending on the date of distribution or transfer begins after December 31, 1961, the acquiring corporation shall, in computing taxable income for certain taxable years which begin after the date of distribution or transfer, take into account the excess contributions made by the distributor or transferor corporation in the taxable year ending on such date of distribution or transfer and in any of the four taxable years immediately preceding such taxable year but excluding any taxable year beginning before January 1, 1962 (see paragraph (c)(3) of this section). Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, if the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending on the date of distribution or transfer begins after December 31, 1961, and before January 1, 1963, the acquiring corporation shall, in computing taxable income for its first taxable year which begins after the date of distribution or transfer, also take into account the excess contributions made by the distributor or transferor corporation in the taxable year immediately preceding the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending on the date of distribution or transfer (see paragraph (c)(2) of this section). To determine the amount of excess contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation and to integrate them with contributions made by the acquiring corporation for the purpose of determining the charitable contributions deductible by the acquiring corporation for its taxable years beginning immediately after the date of distribution or transfer, it is necessary to apply the provisions of section 170(b)(2) and Sec. 1.170-3 (or, if applicable, section 170(b)(2) and (d)(2) and Sec. 1.170A-11) in accordance with the conditions and limitations of section 381(c)(19) and this section. For taxable years beginning before January 1, 1970, see section 170 for provisions of section 170(b)(2) as referred to in this section. For taxable years beginning after December 31, 1969, see section 170A for provisions of section 170(b)(2) or (d)(2) as referred to in this section. For special rules for applying section 170(d)(2) with respect to contributions paid, or treated as paid, in taxable years beginning before January 1, 1970, see paragraph (d) of Sec. 1.170A-11.
(b) Manner of computing excess charitable contribution carryovers. (1) The amount of any charitable contribution made by a distributor or transferor corporation in any taxable year ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer, or made by the acquiring corporation in any taxable year before its taxable year beginning after the date of distribution or transfer, in excess of the amount allowable as a deduction to such corporation for such taxable year under section 170(b)(2) shall be determined by taking into account the taxable income of, and the contributions made by, that corporation only.
(1) The amount of any charitable contribution made by a distributor or transferor corporation in any taxable year ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer, or made by the acquiring corporation in any taxable year before its taxable year beginning after the date of distribution or transfer, in excess of the amount allowable as a deduction to such corporation for such taxable year under section 170(b)(2) shall be determined by taking into account the taxable income of, and the contributions made by, that corporation only.
(2) An acquiring corporation which, in a distribution or transfer to which section 381(a) applies, acquires the assets of a distributor or transferor corporation which previously acquired the assets of another corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, shall succeed to and take into account, subject to the conditions and limitations of sections 170 and 381, the charitable contribution carryovers available to the first acquiring corporation under sections 170 and 381, including those derived by such first acquiring corporation from its distributor or transferor corporation.
(3) The excess charitable contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation in its taxable year ending on the date of distribution or transfer and in certain immediately preceding taxable years (see paragraph (c) of this section) which are not deductible by the distributor or transferor corporation because of the 5-percent limitation of section 170(b)(2) shall be available to the acquiring corporation without diminution by reason of the fact that the acquiring corporation does not acquire 100 percent of the assets of the distributor or transferor corporation. Thus, if a parent corporation owning 80 percent of all classes of stock of its subsidiary corporation were to acquire its share of the assets of the subsidiary corporation upon a complete liquidation described in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of Sec. 1.381(a)-1, then, subject to the conditions and limitations of this section, 100 percent of the excess contributions made by the subsidiary corporation would be available to the acquiring corporation.
(c) Taxable years to which carryovers apply and amount deductible--(1) Taxable years beginning before January 1, 1962. If the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending on the date of distribution or transfer begins before January 1, 1962:
(1) Taxable years beginning before January 1, 1962. If the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending on the date of distribution or transfer begins before January 1, 1962:
(i) The excess charitable contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation in its taxable year immediately preceding that ending on the date of distribution or transfer, to the extent not deductible by it because of the limitations of section 170(b)(2) in its taxable year ending on that date, shall be deductible by the acquiring corporation to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) in its first taxable year beginning after the date of distribution or transfer. Any portion of such excess which is not deductible under this section by the acquiring corporation in such first taxable year shall not be deducted by that corporation in any other taxable year.
(ii) The excess charitable contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation in its taxable year ending on the date of distribution or transfer shall first be deductible by the acquiring corporation to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) and this section in its first taxable year beginning after that date and then, to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) and this section, in its second taxable year beginning after that date. Any portion of such excess which is not deductible under this section by the acquiring corporation in such first and second taxable years shall not be deducted by that corporation in any other taxable year.
(2) Taxable years beginning in 1962. If the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending on the date of distribution or transfer begins after December 31, 1961, and before January 1, 1963:
(i) The excess charitable contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation in its taxable year immediately preceding that ending on the date of distribution or transfer, to the extent not deductible by it because of the limitations of section 170(b)(2) in its taxable year ending on that date, shall be deductible by the acquiring corporation to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) in its first taxable year beginning after the date of distribution or transfer. Any portion of such excess which is not deductible under this section by the acquiring corporation in such first year shall not be deducted by that corporation in any other taxable year.
(ii) The excess charitable contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation in its taxable year ending on the date of distribution or transfer and beginning after December 31, 1961, and before January 1, 1963, shall first be deductible by the acquiring corporation to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) and this section in its first taxable year beginning after that date and then, to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) and this section, in its second, third, fourth, and fifth taxable year, in order of time, beginning after that date. Any portion of such excess which is not deductible under this section by the acquiring corporation in such 5 taxable years shall not be deducted by that corporation in any other taxable year.
(3) Taxable years beginning after December 31, 1962. (i) If the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending on the date of distribution or transfer begins after December 31, 1962, the excess charitable contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation in its taxable year ending on the date of distribution or transfer and in each of its four immediately preceding taxable years (excluding any taxable year beginning before January 1, 1962), to the extent not deductible by it because of the limitations of section 170(b)(2) in its taxable year ending on the date of distribution or transfer or its prior taxable years, shall be deductible by the acquiring corporation to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) (or, if applicable, section 170(d)(2)) and subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, in its taxable years which begin after the date of distribution or transfer. However, any portion of the excess charitable contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation in a particular taxable year, to which this subparagraph is applicable, which is not deductible under this section within the 5 taxable years immediately following the taxable year in which the contribution was paid by the distributor or transferor corporation shall not be deductible by the acquiring corporation in any other taxable year.
(i) If the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation ending on the date of distribution or transfer begins after December 31, 1962, the excess charitable contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation in its taxable year ending on the date of distribution or transfer and in each of its four immediately preceding taxable years (excluding any taxable year beginning before January 1, 1962), to the extent not deductible by it because of the limitations of section 170(b)(2) in its taxable year ending on the date of distribution or transfer or its prior taxable years, shall be deductible by the acquiring corporation to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) (or, if applicable, section 170(d)(2)) and subdivision (ii) of this subparagraph, in its taxable years which begin after the date of distribution or transfer. However, any portion of the excess charitable contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation in a particular taxable year, to which this subparagraph is applicable, which is not deductible under this section within the 5 taxable years immediately following the taxable year in which the contribution was paid by the distributor or transferor corporation shall not be deductible by the acquiring corporation in any other taxable year.
(ii) For purposes of determining the 5 taxable years in which the excess contributions may be deducted, all taxable years of the distributor or transferor corporation subsequent to the taxable year in which the excess contribution was made, including the taxable year ending on the date of distribution or transfer shall be treated as taxable years of the acquiring corporation.
(iii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. X Corporation and Y Corporation both compute taxable income on the calendar year basis. X Corporation has excess charitable contributions for 1962 and 1964. On December 31, 1966, X Corporation distributes all its assets to Y Corporation in a complete liquidation to which section 381(a) applies. The excess 1962 charitable contributions of X Corporation (to the extent not deductible by X because of the limitations of section 170(b)(2) in its taxable years 1963 through 1966) may be deducted by Y Corporation only in 1967. Y Corporation's taxable year 1967 is the fifth taxable year succeeding the taxable year 1962 (the year in which the excess contributions were made), and the portion of such excess contributions which is not deductible in the 5 taxable years immediately succeeding 1962 (1963 through 1967) is not deductible by Y Corporation in any other taxable year. Any excess charitable contributions for 1964 to which Y Corporation may be entitled must be deducted by Y Corporation (if deductible at all) in 1967, 1968, and 1969 since such years are the third, fourth, and fifth taxable years succeeding the taxable year 1964 (the year in which the excess contributions were paid).
(4) General rules. No excess charitable contributions made by a distributor or transferor corporation shall be deductible by the acquiring corporation in its taxable year which includes the date of distribution or transfer. In addition, an excess charitable contribution made by a distributor or transferor corporation in a taxable year prior to the taxable year of the transfer is only deductible by the distributor or transferor corporation, subject to the limitations of section 170(b)(2) (or, if applicable, section 170(d)(2)), in its subsequent taxable years which begin on or before the date of distribution or transfer, and by the acquiring corporation in its taxable year or years beginning after the date of distribution or transfer.
(d) Rules governing amounts deductible by acquiring corporations. (1) In applying the provisions of section 170(b)(2) (or, if applicable, section 170(d)(2)) for the purpose of determining the amount of excess charitable contributions which are deductible by the acquiring corporation in its taxable years beginning after the date of distribution or transfer, all taxable years of the distributor or tranferor and acquiring corporations which, with respect to a particular taxable year beginning after the date of distribution or transfer, constitute the same numbered preceding taxable year shall together be considered as a 1 taxable year even though the taxable years involved may not end on the same date. Thus, for example, all taxable years of the distributor or transferor and acquiring corporations which, with respect to the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation beginning after the date of distribution or transfer, constitutes the second preceding taxable year shall together be considered as 1 taxable year even though the taxable years involved may not end on the same date. Any excess charitable contributions carried over from preceding taxable years which are considered as 1 taxable year shall be taken into account by the acquiring corporation as one amount, without regard to the extent to which the contributions were made by a distributor or transferor corporation or the acquiring corporation.
(1) In applying the provisions of section 170(b)(2) (or, if applicable, section 170(d)(2)) for the purpose of determining the amount of excess charitable contributions which are deductible by the acquiring corporation in its taxable years beginning after the date of distribution or transfer, all taxable years of the distributor or tranferor and acquiring corporations which, with respect to a particular taxable year beginning after the date of distribution or transfer, constitute the same numbered preceding taxable year shall together be considered as a 1 taxable year even though the taxable years involved may not end on the same date. Thus, for example, all taxable years of the distributor or transferor and acquiring corporations which, with respect to the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation beginning after the date of distribution or transfer, constitutes the second preceding taxable year shall together be considered as 1 taxable year even though the taxable years involved may not end on the same date. Any excess charitable contributions carried over from preceding taxable years which are considered as 1 taxable year shall be taken into account by the acquiring corporation as one amount, without regard to the extent to which the contributions were made by a distributor or transferor corporation or the acquiring corporation.
(2) For purposes of this paragraph, each taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation beginning on or before the date of distribution or transfer shall be treated as a preceding taxable year with reference to the acquiring corporation's taxable years beginning after such date. For example, the taxable year of a distributor or transferor corporation which ends on the date of distribution or transfer shall be considered a first preceding taxable year with reference to the acquiring corporation's first taxable year beginning after that date, a second preceding taxable year with reference to the acquiring corporation's second taxable year beginning after that date, and so forth with respect to succeeding taxable years of the acquiring corporation. Also, for example, the taxable year of a distributor or transferor corporation which immediately precedes its taxable year ending on the date of distribution or transfer shall be considered a second preceding taxable year with reference to the acquiring corporation's first taxable year beginning after that date.
(e) Illustration. The application of this section may be illustrated by the following example:
(i) X Corporation is organized on April 1, 1956, and computes its taxable income on the basis of the fiscal year ending March 31. Y Corporation is organized on July 1, 1955, and computes its taxable income on the basis of the fiscal year ending June 30. Z Corporation is organized on January 1, 1956, and computes its taxable income on the basis of the calendar year. On June 30, 1957, X Corporation distributes all its assets to Y Corporation in a complete liquidation to which section 381(a) applies. On November 30, 1957, Y Corporation transfers all its assets to Z Corporation in a statutory merger to which section 381(a) applies.
(ii) The 5-percent limitation (computed in the manner prescribed by section 170(b)(2)), the charitable contributions actually paid, and the excess contributions with respect to each such corporation during the taxable years involved are as follows:
Name of corporation X X
Taxable year ending 3-31-57 6-30-575-percent limitation................... $20,000 $9,000Current contributions.................. 32,000 15,000
----------------------
(Excess contributions)............... (12,000) (6,000)------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name of corporation Y Y Y
Taxable year ending 6-30-56 6-30-57 11-30-575-percent limitation................... $15,000 $10,000 $18,000Current contributions.................. 29,000 0 17,000
-----------
(Excess contributions)............... (14,000) ......... .........
---------------------
Balance of 5-percent limitation...... ......... 10,000 1,000------------------------------------------------------------------------
Name of corporation Z Z Z
Taxable year ending 12-31-56 12-31-57 12-31-585-percent limitation................... $10,000 $30,000 $58,000Current contributions.................. 40,000 28,000 92,000
-----------
(Excess contributions)............... (30,000) ......... .........
---------------------
Balance of 5-percent limitation...... ......... 2,000 56,000
(iii) X Corporation was in existence for two taxable years, in each of which it made charitable contributions in excess of the maximum amount deductible for those years under section 170(b)(2). The excess contributions made in the year ending March 31, 1957, of $12,000, are deductible by X Corporation in its short taxable year ending June 30, 1957, and then by Y Corporation in its short taxable year ending November 30, 1957, in each instance in the manner and to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) and this section. The excess contributions made by X Corporation in the year ending June 30, 1957, of $6,000, are deductible by Y Corporation in its short taxable year ending November 30, 1957, and then by Z Corporation in its taxable year 1958, in each instance in the manner and to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) and this section.
(iv) Y Corporation was in existence for three taxable years. In the year ended June 30, 1956, its contributions in excess of the amount deductible for that year under section 170(b)(2) amounted to $14,000. Such excess is deductible by Y Corporation in its taxable year ending June 30, 1957, and, together with X Corporation's excess contributions of $18,000, in its short taxable year ending November 30, 1957, in each instance in the manner and to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) and this section. Accordingly, since Y Corporation made no contributions in its taxable year ending June 30, 1957, its deduction for that year on account of excess contributions carried over is $10,000, an amount equal to the 5-percent limitation of section 170(b)(2). The deduction is attributable to excess contributions made by Y Corporation in the taxable year ended June 30, 1956; thus, the excess of those contributions over $10,000, namely, $4,000, is deductible by Y Corporation in its short taxable year ending November 30, 1957, in the manner and to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) and this section. With respect to the short taxable year ending November 30, 1957, the excess contributions of the second preceding year are X Corporation's excess contributions of $12,000 made in the year ending March 31, 1957, and Y Corporation's excess contributions of $4,000 made in the year ending June 30, 1956, which were not deductible by Y Corporation in the taxable year ending June 30, 1957, because of the 5-percent limitation prescribed by section 170(b)(2), an aggregate of $16,000. Inasmuch as Y Corporation's limitation for the short taxable year ended November 30, 1957, exceeds the contributions made in that year by $1,000, the excess contributions of the second preceding taxable year are deductible in the taxable year ending November 30, 1957, to the extent of $1,000 and the remainder ($15,000) is not deductible by any corporation in any taxable year. The excess contributions of the first preceding taxable year, namely, X Corporation's excess contributions made in the short taxable year ending June 30, 1957, are deductible by Z Corporation in its taxable year 1958, in the manner and to the extent prescribed in section 170(b)(2) and this section.
(v) Z Corporation has been in existence for 3 taxable years. The contributions made in 1956 in excess of the amount deductible for that year under section 170(b)(2) amounted to $30,000. Such excess is deductible by Z Corporation in its taxable year 1957 and, together with X Corporation's excess contributions of $6,000 (derived through Y Corporation) made in the taxable year ending June 30, 1957, in the taxable year 1958, in each instance in the manner and to the extent prescribed by section 170(b)(2) and this section. Thus, $2,000 of the $30,000 excess contributions made in the year 1956 are deducted in 1957 and the remainder ($28,000), together with X Corporation's excess contributions of $6,000 made in the short taxable year ending June 30, 1957, are deducted in 1958 since the aggregate of such amounts plus the contributions actually made in that year does not exceed the 5-percent limitation prescribed by section 170(b)(2). [T.D. 6552, 26 FR 1992, Mar. 8, 1961, as amended by T.D. 6900, 31 FR 14642, Nov. 17, 1966; T.D. 7207, 37 FR 20795, Oct. 5, 1972] Sec. 1.381(c)(21)-1 Pre-1954 adjustments resulting from change in method of accounting.
(a) Carryover requirement. Section 381(c)(21) provides that, in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, an acquiring corporation shall take into account the net amount of any adjustments described in section 481(b)(4) (relating to adjustments arising from changes in accounting methods initiated by the taxpayer attributable to pre-1954 Code years) of the distributor or transferor corporation to the extent that such net amount of such adjustments has not been taken into account in any taxable year, including a short taxable year, by the distributor or transferor corporation. The acquiring corporation shall take into account in each taxable year beginning with the taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer the net amount of such adjustments in the same manner and at the same time as such net amount would have been taken into account by the distributor or transferor corporation. Thus, the amount of any such adjustment which the acquiring corporation shall take into account in each taxable year shall be the same amount that would have been taken into account in each taxable year by the distributor or transferor corporation.
(b) This section may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. On January 1, 1960, X Corporation, a calendar year taxpayer, voluntarily changed its method of accounting giving rise to a $50,000 adjustment under section 481(a), of which $20,000 is attributable to pre-1954 Code years. Under section 481(b)(4) the $20,000 adjustment is to be spread over 1960 and the following 9 years at the rate of $2,000 each year. On November 1, 1963, all the assets of X Corporation are acquired by Y Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies. Y Corporation reports its income on a fiscal year ending June 30. X and Y Corporations must take into account the $20,000 adjustment at the rate of $2,000 in each taxable year in the following time and manner:
X CorporationCalendar years 1960-62 ($2,000x3)................. $6,000Short taxable year ending Nov. 1, 1963 ($2,000x1). 2,000 $8,000
-----------
Y CorporationFiscal years ending:
June 30, 1964 ($2,000x1)........................ 2,000
June 30, 1965-69 ($2,000x5)..................... 10,000 12,000
---------------------
......... 20,000
(c) Successive transactions to which section 381(a) applies. The provisions of this section shall apply in the case of successive transactions to which section 381(a) applies. Thus, if R Corporation, which was taking into account adjustments described in section 481(b)(4), distributes or transfers its assets to S Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, and S Corporation was required to take into account any remaining portion of such adjustments under section 381(c)(21) and this section, and if subsequently S Corporation distributes or transfers its assets to T Corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, then T Corporation, under section 381(c)(21) and this section, shall take into account any remaining portion of such adjustments not previously taken into account by R and S Corporations.
(d) Acquiring corporation not receiving all the assets. The adjustments described in this section acquired from a distributor or transferor corporation by an acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies is not reduced by reason of the fact that the acquiring corporation does not acquire 100 percent of the assets of the distributor or transferor corporation. [T.D. 6553, 26 FR 2171, Mar. 15, 1961] Sec. 1.381(c)(22)-1 Successor life insurance company.
(a) Carryover requirement. If in a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1957, a distributor or transferor corporation which is an insurance company is acquired by a corporation which is an insurance company in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, section 381(c)(22) provides that the acquiring corporation shall take into account the appropriate items which the distributor or transferor corporation was required to take into account for purposes of part I, subchapter L, chapter 1 of the Internal Revenue Code. Furthermore, except as otherwise provided by this section, the acquiring corporation shall take into account the items described in paragraphs (2) through (21), other than paragraphs (14), (15), and (17), of section 381(c) and the regulations thereunder. For example, the acquiring corporation shall take into account the reserves described in section 810(c) distributed or transferred to it as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer by the distributor or transferor corporation in accordance with the provisions of section 381(c)(4) and the regulations thereunder. For provisions defining the date of distribution or transfer, see paragraph (b) of Sec. 1.381(b)-1.
(b) Items required to be taken into account by acquiring corporation. If a transaction meets the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section, the acquiring corporation shall, except as otherwise provided, take into account as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer the following items of the distributor or transferor corporation:
(1) The operations loss carryovers (as determined under section 812), subject to conditions and limitations consistent with the conditions and limitations prescribed in section 381(c)(1) and the regulations thereunder. For example, a loss from operations for a loss year of a distributor or transferor corporation which ends on or before the last day of a loss year of the acquiring corporation shall be considered to be a loss from operations for a year prior to such loss year of the acquiring corporation. All references in section 381(c)(1) and the regulations thereunder to section 172 shall be construed as referring to the appropriate corresponding provisions of section 812. Thus, a reference to section 172(b) shall be construed as referring to section 812 (b) and (d). In determining the span of years for which a loss from operations may be carried, the number of taxable years for which the distributor or transferor corporation was authorized to do business as an insurance company shall be taken into account. For purposes of this determination, the taxable year of the distributor or transferor corporation which ends on the date of distribution or transfer shall be taken into account even though such taxable year is a period of less than 12 months.
(2)(i) The investment yield and the beginning of the year asset balance for the distributor or transferor corporation's taxable year ending with the close of the date of distribution or transfer. Such items shall be integrated with the investment yield and beginning of the year asset balance of the acquiring corporation for its first taxable year ending after such date of distribution or transfer for purposes of determining the current earnings rate of the acquiring corporation for such taxable year. Furthermore, for purposes of determining the average earnings rate of the acquiring corporation, the investment yield and mean of the assets of the distributor or transferor corporation for its 4 taxable years immediately preceding its taxable year which closes with the date of distribution or transfer shall be integrated with the investment yield and mean of the assets of the acquiring corporation for such corresponding taxable years.
(i) The investment yield and the beginning of the year asset balance for the distributor or transferor corporation's taxable year ending with the close of the date of distribution or transfer. Such items shall be integrated with the investment yield and beginning of the year asset balance of the acquiring corporation for its first taxable year ending after such date of distribution or transfer for purposes of determining the current earnings rate of the acquiring corporation for such taxable year. Furthermore, for purposes of determining the average earnings rate of the acquiring corporation, the investment yield and mean of the assets of the distributor or transferor corporation for its 4 taxable years immediately preceding its taxable year which closes with the date of distribution or transfer shall be integrated with the investment yield and mean of the assets of the acquiring corporation for such corresponding taxable years.
(ii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following examples:
Example 1. X qualified as a life insurance company in 1949. Y qualified as a life insurance company in 1951. On June 30, 1961, at which time both X and Y were life insurance companies (as defined in section 801(a)), X transferred all its assets to Y in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. For its taxable year ending on June 30, 1961, X had investment yield of $15 and assets at the beginning of such taxable year of $450. For purposes of determining its current earnings rate for its taxable year ending on December 31, 1961, Y had investment yield of $45 (including the $15 of investment yield of X), assets at the beginning of such taxable year of $1,250 (including the $450 of X's assets at the beginning of its taxable year 1961), and assets at the end of such taxable year of $1,750 (after the application of section 806(a)). Under the provisions of subdivision (i) of this subparagraph, the current earnings rate of Y for the taxable year 1961 would be 3 percent, determined by dividing the investment yield of Y, $45, by the mean of the assets of Y, $1,500 ($1,250+$1,750/2). In order to determine its average earnings rate and adjusted reserves rate for the taxable year 1961, Y would make up the following schedule: --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Investment yield Mean of assets Current-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- earnings
Column 3 Column 6 rate of Y
(Col. 1 + (Col. 4 + ------------
Col. 2) Col. 5)
Taxable year Column 1--X Column 2--Y integrated Column 4--X Column 5--Y integrated Column 7
investment means of (Col. 3 /
yield assets Col. 6)--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1960......................................................... $16 $26 $42 $400 $800 $1,200 3.51959......................................................... 16 24 40 500 750 1,250 3.21958......................................................... 17 22 39 650 650 1,300 3.01957......................................................... 19 21 40 700 500 1,200 3.3-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- For the taxable year 1961, Y would have an average earnings rate of 3.2 percent, computed by taking into account the current earnings rates for the taxable year 1961 and each of the 4 taxable years immediately preceding such taxable year. The adjusted reserves rate for such taxable year would be 3 percent since the current earnings rate of 3 percent for 1961 is lower than the average earnings rate of 3.2 percent.
Example 2. The facts are the same as in Example (1), except that the taxable year in issue is 1962, and the current earnings rate of Y for such taxable year was 3.8 percent. For the taxable year 1962, Y would have an average earnings rate of 3.3 percent, computed by taking into account only the current earnings rates for the taxable year 1962 and each of the 4 taxable years immediately preceding such taxable year. The adjusted reserves rate for such taxable year would be 3.3 percent since the average earnings rate of 3.3 percent is lower than the 1962 current earnings rate of 3.8 percent.
(3) To the extent there are any amounts accrued for discounts in the nature of interest which have not been included as interest paid under section 805(e)(3), the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation for purposes of including such amounts as interest paid.
(4) Any adjustment required by section 806(b) with respect to an item described in section 810(c) shall be made by the acquiring corporation in its first taxable year which begins after the date of distribution or transfer.
(5) The amount of the deduction provided by section 809(d)(6), as limited by section 809(f), for all taxable years of the distributor or transferor corporation which end on and before the date of distribution or transfer (irrespective of whether or not the distributor or transferor corporation claimed this deduction for such taxable years) for the purpose of determining the limitation under section 809(d)(6).
(6)(i) To the extent there are any remaining net increases or net decreases in reserves required to be taken into account by the distributor or transferor corporation under section 810(d)(1), the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation as of its first taxable year which begins after the date of distribution or transfer.
(i) To the extent there are any remaining net increases or net decreases in reserves required to be taken into account by the distributor or transferor corporation under section 810(d)(1), the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation as of its first taxable year which begins after the date of distribution or transfer.
(ii) The provisions of this subparagraph may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. Assume that the amount of an item described in section 810(c) of X, a life insurance company, at the beginning of the taxable year 1959 is $100. Assume that at the end of the taxable year 1959, as a result of a change in the basis used in computing such item during the taxable year, the amount of the item (computed on the new basis) is $200 but computed on the old basis would have been $150. Since the amount of the item at the end of the taxable year computed on the new basis, $200, exceeds the amount of the item at the end of the taxable year computed on the old basis, $150, by $50, section 810(d)(1) provides that one-tenth of the amount of such excess, or $5, shall be taken into account by X as a net increase referred to in section 809(d)(2) and paragraph (a)(2) of Sec. 1.809-5 in determining gain or loss from operations for each of the 10 taxable years immediately following the taxable year 1959. Assume further that on June 30, 1961, X transferred all its assets to Y, a life insurance company, in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. Under the provisions of section 810(d)(1), X would include $5 as a net increase under section 809(d)(2) and paragraph (a)(2) of Sec. 1.809-5 in determining gain or loss from operations for its taxable years 1960 and 1961. Thus, the remaining net increase to be taken into account by X under section 810(d)(1) is $40 (eight-tenths of $50). Accordingly, Y shall take into account $5 as a net increase referred to in section 809(d)(2) and paragraph (a)(2) of Sec. 1.809-5 in determining gain or loss from operations for each of its 8 taxable years beginning in 1962 ($5x8=$40).
(7)(i) The dollar balances in the shareholders surplus account, policyholders surplus account, and other accounts provided, however, that the acquiring corporation is a stock life insurance company. The dollar balance in the policyholders surplus account shall reflect the amount (if any) treated as a subtraction from such account by reason of the application of the limitation provided under section 815(d)(4) immediately prior to the close of the date of distribution or transfer. To the extent that any amount must be added to the shareholders surplus account as a result of the application of the limitation provided under section 815(d)(4), the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation as of its first taxable year which begins after the date of distribution or transfer. However, any amounts attributable to money or other property not permitted to be received without the recognition of gain (i.e., boot) distributed to a person other than the acquiring corporation under section 381(a) shall be treated as a distribution under section 815.
(i) The dollar balances in the shareholders surplus account, policyholders surplus account, and other accounts provided, however, that the acquiring corporation is a stock life insurance company. The dollar balance in the policyholders surplus account shall reflect the amount (if any) treated as a subtraction from such account by reason of the application of the limitation provided under section 815(d)(4) immediately prior to the close of the date of distribution or transfer. To the extent that any amount must be added to the shareholders surplus account as a result of the application of the limitation provided under section 815(d)(4), the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation as of its first taxable year which begins after the date of distribution or transfer. However, any amounts attributable to money or other property not permitted to be received without the recognition of gain (i.e., boot) distributed to a person other than the acquiring corporation under section 381(a) shall be treated as a distribution under section 815.
(ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(7)(i) of this section, if the distributor or transferor corporation distributes or transfers less than 50 percent of its insurance business to the acquiring corporation, then the acquiring corporation shall succeed to a ratable portion of the dollar balances in the distributor's or transferor's shareholders surplus account, policyholders surplus account, and other accounts. The percentage of the accounts to which the acquiring corporation succeeds is determined by the ratio of the distributor's or transferor's insurance reserves for the contracts transferred to the acquiring corporation, as maintained under section 816(b), to the distributor's or transferor's reserves for all of its contracts maintained under section 816(b) immediately before the earlier of the distribution or transfer or the adoption of the plan of liquidation or reorganization. For transactions in which the distributor liquidates pursuant to an election under section 338(h)(10), see Sec. 1.338-11(f) for the treatment of its remaining policyholders surplus account. For all other transactions subject to this paragraph, the distributor or transferor must take into account as income its remaining policyholders surplus account to the extent the fair market value of its assets (net of liabilities) distributed or transferred to the acquiring corporation or to the transferor's shareholders pursuant to the plan of liquidation or reorganization exceeds the distributor's or transferor's remaining shareholders surplus account.
(iii) If, pursuant to a plan in existence at the time of the liquidation or reorganization, the acquiring corporation transfers any insurance or annuity contract it received in the liquidation or reorganization to another person, then, for purposes of paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this section, that contract shall be deemed to have been transferred by the transferor to that other person after the adoption of the plan of liquidation or reorganization. If the transferor is an old target within the meaning of Sec. 1.338(h)(10)-1(d)(2), any transfer by the acquiring corporation to the purchasing corporation (as defined in Sec. 1.338-2(c)(11)) or to any person related to the purchasing corporation within the meaning of section 197(f)(9)(C) within two years of the transfer described in section 381(a) will be presumed to have been pursuant to a plan in existence at the time of the liquidation or reorganization.
(iv) If the acquiring corporation is a mutual life insurance company, the dollar balances in the shareholders surplus account, policyholders surplus account, and other accounts shall not be taken into account by such acquiring corporation and the distributor or transferor corporation shall be subject to the provisions of section 815(d)(2)(A) as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer.
(v) The provisions of this paragraph (b)(7) are illustrated by the following examples:
Example 1. P buys the stock of insurance company target, T, from S for $16, and P and S make a section 338(h)(10) election for T. T transfers no insurance contracts to S, or any related party, in connection with the transaction. Further, assume that T had $10 in its policyholders surplus account and no balance in its shareholders surplus account or other accounts. Immediately before the deemed asset sale, old T is required to include as ordinary income the $10 in the policyholders surplus account.
Example 2. Assume the same facts as in Example 1, except that T holds a block of life insurance contracts P does not wish to acquire, and, immediately before the sale of T stock, S causes T to distribute the unwanted block of insurance contracts to S. Further, assume that S is an insurance company, that the distribution of contracts is one of series of distributions in complete cancellation or redemption of all of its stock (the others occurring under Sec. 1.338(h)(10)-1(d)(4)(i)) that qualifies as a complete liquidation under section 332, and that old T's tax reserves with respect to the distributed contracts represent one-tenth of old T's tax reserves with respect to all of its life insurance contracts. Because T transfers less than 50 percent of its life insurance business to S in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, S succeeds to a ratable portion of old T's policyholders surplus account ($1), and old T includes as ordinary income the remaining $9 of that account.
Example 3. Assume the same facts as in Example 2, except that 14 months after the deemed asset sale, S and X, a person related to new T under section 197(f)(9)(C), engage in an indemnity reinsurance transaction involving the contracts transferred to S from old T. Because X is related to the purchasing corporation (P) under section 197(f)(9)(C), and X receives contracts from the acquiring corporation (S) that S acquired from old T within two years of the transfer from old T to S, the contracts are presumed to have been transferred pursuant to a plan in existence at the time of old T's liquidation. If S cannot establish otherwise, old T is treated as having distributed the remainder of its policyholders surplus account. In that case, in the taxable year of the indemnity reinsurance transaction, S takes into account as ordinary income the portion of the old T's accounts ($1) that old T or S has not previously taken into account as income.
(8) To the extent that any amount must be added to the shareholders surplus account as a result of an election made under section 815(d)(1) by the distributor or transferor corporation, the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation as of its first taxable year which begins after the date of distribution or transfer.
(9) The amount of the life insurance reserves at the end of 1958, but only for the purpose of applying the limitation provided under section 815(d)(4)(B).
(10) To the extent there are amounts subject to the provisions of section 817(d), the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation.
(11) To the extent there are any installments of tax imposed by section 818(e)(3)(A) remaining to be paid, the acquiring corporation shall be treated as the distributor or transferor corporation for the purpose of paying such installments.
(12) The capital loss carryovers, subject to conditions and limitations consistent with the conditions and limitations prescribed in section 381(c)(3) and the regulations thereunder, except that any net capital loss of the distributor or transferor corporation for a taxable year beginning before January 1, 1959, shall not be taken into account. See section 817(c).
(13)(i) The transferor's unamortized policy acquisition expenses or positive or negative capitalization requirements on its specified insurance contracts.
(i) The transferor's unamortized policy acquisition expenses or positive or negative capitalization requirements on its specified insurance contracts.
(ii) Notwithstanding paragraph (b)(13)(i) of this section, if the distributor or transferor corporation transfers less than 50 percent of its insurance business to the acquiring corporation, then the acquiring corporation shall succeed to a ratable portion of the transferor's unamortized policy acquisition expenses or positive or negative capitalization requirements on its specified insurance contracts. The percentage of such acquisition expenses or positive or negative capitalization requirements to which the acquiring corporation succeeds is determined by the ratio of the distributor's or transferor's insurance reserves for the contracts transferred to the acquiring corporation, as maintained under section 816(b), to the distributor's or transferor's reserves for all of its contracts maintained under section 816(b) immediately before the earlier of the distribution or transfer or the adoption of the plan of liquidation or reorganization. For amounts of the distributor's or transferor's unamortized policy acquisition expenses or positive or negative capitalization requirements on its specified insurance contracts to which the acquirer does not succeed to under this paragraph, and, for transactions in which the transferor liquidates pursuant to an election under section 338(h)(10), see Sec. 1.338-11(f) for the treatment of its capitalized amounts under section 848.
(iii) If, pursuant to a plan in existence at the time of the liquidation or reorganization, the acquiring corporation transfers any insurance or annuity contract it received in the liquidation or reorganization to another person, then, for purposes of paragraph (b)(13)(ii) of this section, that contract shall be deemed to have been transferred by the transferor to that other person after the adoption of the plan of liquidation or reorganization. If the transferor is an old target within the meaning of Sec. 1.338(h)(10)-1(d)(2), any transfer by the acquiring corporation to the purchasing corporation (as defined in Sec. 1.338-2(c)(11)) or to any person related to the purchasing corporation within the meaning of section 197(f)(9)(C) within two years of the transfer described in section 381(a) will be presumed to have been pursuant to a plan in existence at the time of the liquidation or reorganization.
(14) The special loss discount account, provided, however, that the acquiring corporation will succeed to the special loss discount account only to the extent that it is attributable to the portion of the transferor's insurance business acquired by the acquiring corporation in the section 381 transaction.
(c) Effective dates--(1) In general. This section applies to the acquisition of assets of an insurance company by another insurance company in a transaction to which section 381 applies for taxable years beginning after December 31, 1957.
(1) In general. This section applies to the acquisition of assets of an insurance company by another insurance company in a transaction to which section 381 applies for taxable years beginning after December 31, 1957.
(2) Special rules for section 381 transactions. Paragraphs (a), (b)(7), (b)(13), and (b)(14) of this section apply to the acquisition of assets of an insurance company by another insurance company in a transaction to which section 381 applies on or after April 10, 2006.
(3) Joint retroactive election. The distributor or transferor and the acquiring corporation may jointly make an irrevocable election to apply paragraphs (a), (b)(7), (b)(13), and (b)(14) of this section to a transaction to which section 381 applies occurring before April 10, 2006 provided that the taxable year that includes the acquisition and all subsequent affected taxable years of both the distributor or transferor and the acquiring corporation are years for which an assessment of deficiency or a refund for overpayment is not prevented by any law or rule of law.
(4) Time and manner of making the joint election. The distributor or transferor and the acquiring corporation may make an election described in paragraph (c)(2) of this section by each attaching a statement to its original or amended income tax return for the taxable year that includes the acquisition of assets in a transaction to which section 381 applies. The statement must be entitled ``Election to retroactively apply the rules of section 1.381(c)(22)-1 to a transaction completed before April 10, 2006'' and must include the following information--
(i) The name and EIN of the distributor or transferor and the acquiring corporation; and
(ii) The following declaration (or a substantially similar declaration): The distributor or transferor and the acquiring corporation have each amended its income tax returns for the taxable year that includes the acquisition of assets in a transaction to which section 381 applies and for all affected subsequent years to reflect the rules in paragraphs (a), (b)(7), (b)(13), and (b)(14) of section 1.381(c)(22)-1. [T.D. 6625, 27 FR 12541, Dec. 19, 1962, as amended by T.D. 9257, 71 FR 18004, Apr. 10, 2006; T.D. 9377, 73 FR 3873, Jan. 23, 2007] Sec. 1.381(c)(23)-1 Investment credit carryovers in certain corporate acquisitions.
(a) Carryover requirement. (1) Section 381(c)(23) requires the acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381 applies to succeed to and take into account under such regulations as may be prescribed by the Secretary or his delegate, the investment credit carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation. To determine the amount of these carryovers as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, and to integrate them with any carryovers and carrybacks of the acquiring corporation for purposes of determining the amount of credit allowed by section 38 to the acquiring corporation for taxable years ending after the date of distribution or transfer, it is necessary to apply the provisions of sections 46, 47, and 48 in accordance with the conditions and limitations of this section.
(1) Section 381(c)(23) requires the acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381 applies to succeed to and take into account under such regulations as may be prescribed by the Secretary or his delegate, the investment credit carryovers of the distributor or transferor corporation. To determine the amount of these carryovers as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer, and to integrate them with any carryovers and carrybacks of the acquiring corporation for purposes of determining the amount of credit allowed by section 38 to the acquiring corporation for taxable years ending after the date of distribution or transfer, it is necessary to apply the provisions of sections 46, 47, and 48 in accordance with the conditions and limitations of this section.
(2) The investment credit carryovers and carrybacks of the acquiring corporation determined as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall be computed without reference to any unused credit of a distributor or transferor corporation. The investment credit carryovers of a distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall be determined without reference to any unused credit of the acquiring corporation.
(b) Carryback of unused credits. An unused credit of the acquiring corporation for any taxable year ending after the date of distribution or transfer shall not be carried back in computing the credit allowed by section 38 to a distributor or transferor corporation. However, an unused credit of the acquiring corporation for any such taxable year shall be carried back in accordance with section 46(b)(1) in computing the credit allowed to the acquiring corporation for a taxable year ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer. If a distributor or transferor corporation remains in existence after the date of distribution or transfer, an unused credit sustained by it for any taxable year beginning after such date shall be carried back in accordance with section 46(b)(1) in computing the credit allowed by section 38 to such corporation for a taxable year ending on or before that date, but may not be carried back or over in computing the credit allowed by section 38 to the acquiring corporation.
(c) Computation of carryovers and carrybacks. (1) Subject to the modifications set forth in this paragraph, the provisions of Sec. 1.46-2 shall apply in computing carryovers and carrybacks of unused credits to taxable years of the acquiring corporation.
(1) Subject to the modifications set forth in this paragraph, the provisions of Sec. 1.46-2 shall apply in computing carryovers and carrybacks of unused credits to taxable years of the acquiring corporation.
(2)(i) The investment credit carryovers available to the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall first be carried to the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after that date. This rule applies whether the date of distribution or transfer is on the last day, or any other day, of the acquiring corporation's taxable year.
(i) The investment credit carryovers available to the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall first be carried to the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after that date. This rule applies whether the date of distribution or transfer is on the last day, or any other day, of the acquiring corporation's taxable year.
(ii) The investment credit carryovers available to the distributor or transferor corporation as of the close of the date of distribution or transfer shall be carried to the acquiring corporation without diminution by reason of the fact that the acquiring corporation does not acquire 100 percent of the assets of the distributor or transferor corporation.
(3) An unused credit of a distributor or transferor corporation for a taxable year which ends on or before the last day of a taxable year of the acquiring corporation shall be considered to be an unused credit for a year prior to such taxable year of the acquiring corporation. If the acquiring corporation has acquired the assets of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on the same date of distribution or transfer, the unused credit years of the distributor or transferor corporations shall be taken into account in the order in which such years terminate. If any one of the unused credit years of a distributor or transferor corporation ends on the same day as the unused credit year of another distributor or transferor corporation, either unused credit year may be taken into account before the other.
(4) The extent to which an investment credit carryover of a distributor or transferor corporation or of an acquiring corporation from an unused credit year ending before January 1, 1971, may be taken into account by the acquiring corporation for a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1970, shall be determined without regard to the credit earned by the acquiring corporation for such year. Thus, in such a case, the amount of unused credit from such unused credit years which may be taken into account in a taxable year of the acquiring corporation beginning after December 31, 1970, shall be determined solely with reference to the limitation based on amount of tax for such taxable year (without reduction for the credit earned for such year).
(d) Computation of carryovers when date of distribution or transfer occurs on last day of acquiring corporation's taxable year. The computation of the investment credit carryovers from the distributor or transferor corporation and from the acquiring corporation in a case where the date of distribution or transfer occurs on the last day of a taxable year of the acquiring corporation may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. X Corporation and Y Corporation were organized on January 1, 1971, and each corporation files its return on the calendar year basis. On December 31, 1972, X transfers all its assets to Y in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. X's credit earned and its limitation based on amount of tax for its taxable years 1971 and 1972 are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Limitation
X Corporation's taxable year Credit earned based on amount
of tax------------------------------------------------------------------------1971.................................. $10,000 $5,0001972.................................. 5,000 3,000------------------------------------------------------------------------ Y's credit earned and its limitation based on amount of tax for its taxable years 1971 through 1973 are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Limitation
Y Corporation's Credit earned based on amount
of tax------------------------------------------------------------------------1971.................................. $6,000 $5,0001972.................................. 5,000 3,0001973.................................. 3,000 10,000------------------------------------------------------------------------ The sequence for the allowance of unused credits of X Corporation and Y Corporation, and the computation of the carryovers to Y Corporation's calendar year 1974, may be illustrated as follows:
(1) X Corporation's 1971 unused credit. The carryover to Y 1974 is $0, computed as follows: Unused credit................................................ $5,000
Excess of X's 1972 limitation based on tax over credit 0
earned....................................................
----------Carryover to Y's year 1973................................... 5,000
Excess of Y's 1973 limitation based on tax over credit 7,000
earned....................................................
----------Carryover to Y's year 1974................................... 0
(2) Y Corporation's 1971 unused credit. The carryover to Y 1974 is $0, computed as follows: Unused credit................................................ $1,000
Excess of Y's 1972 limitation based on tax over credit 0
earned....................................................
----------Carryover to Y's year 1973................................... 1,000
==========
Excess of Y's 1973 limitation based on tax over credit 7,000
earned....................................................
Less: X's $5,000 carryover from 1971....................... 5,000
----------
2,000
==========Carryover to Y's year 1974................................... 0
(3) X Corporation's 1972 unused credit. The carryover to Y 1974 is $1,000, computed as follows: Unused credit................................................ $2,000
==========
Excess of Y's 1973 limitation based on tax over credit 7,000
earned....................................................
Less: X's $5,000 carryover from 1971 and Y's $1,000 6,000
carryover from 1971.......................................
----------
1,000
==========
Carryover to Y's year 1974................................. 1,000
(4) Y Corporation's 1972 unused credit. The carryover to Y 1974 is $2,000, computed as follows: Unused credit................................................ $2,000
==========Excess of Y's 1973 limitation based on tax over credit earned 7,000Less: X's $5,000 carryover from 1971 Y's $1,000 carryover 7,000
from 1971 and X's $1,000 carryover from 1972................
----------
0
==========Carryover to Y's year 1974................................... 2,000
(5) The aggregate of the investment credit carryovers to Y's year 1974 is $3,000, computed as follows: X's 1972 unused credit....................................... $1,000Y's 1972 unused credit....................................... 2,000
----------
Total.................................................... 3,000
(e) Computation of carryovers when date of distribution or transfer is not on last day of acquiring corporation's taxable year. (1) If the date of distribution or transfer occurs on any day other than the last day of a taxable year of the acquiring corporation, the amount which may be added to the amount allowable as a credit by section 38 for the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after the date of distribution or transfer (hereinafter called the ``year of acquisition'') shall be determined in the following manner. The year of acquisition shall be considered as though it were 2 taxable years. The first of such 2 taxable years shall be referred to in this paragraph as the preacquisition part year and shall begin with the beginning of the year of acquisition and end with the close of the date of distribution or transfer. The second of such 2 taxable years shall be referred to in this paragraph as the postacquisition part year and shall begin with the day following the date of distribution or transfer and shall end with the close of the year of acquisition.
(1) If the date of distribution or transfer occurs on any day other than the last day of a taxable year of the acquiring corporation, the amount which may be added to the amount allowable as a credit by section 38 for the first taxable year of the acquiring corporation ending after the date of distribution or transfer (hereinafter called the ``year of acquisition'') shall be determined in the following manner. The year of acquisition shall be considered as though it were 2 taxable years. The first of such 2 taxable years shall be referred to in this paragraph as the preacquisition part year and shall begin with the beginning of the year of acquisition and end with the close of the date of distribution or transfer. The second of such 2 taxable years shall be referred to in this paragraph as the postacquisition part year and shall begin with the day following the date of distribution or transfer and shall end with the close of the year of acquisition.
(2) The excess limitation for the year of acquisition (i.e., the excess of the limitation based on the amount of tax for such year over the amount of credit earned for such year) shall be divided between the preacquisition part year and the postacquisition part year in proportion to the number of days in each. Thus, if in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies Y Corporation, a calendar year taxpayer, acquires the assets of X Corporation on June 30, 1975, and Y Corporation has an excess limitation of $36,500 for its calendar year 1975, then the excess limitation for the preacquisition part year would be $18,100 ($36,500x181/365) and the excess limitation for the postacquisition part year would be $18,400 ($36,500x184/365).
(3) An unused credit of the acquiring corporation shall be carried to and applied against the excess limitation for the preacquisition part year and then carried to and applied against the excess limitation for the postacquisition part year, whereas an unused credit of the distributor or transferor corporation shall not be carried to the preacquisition part year but shall only be carried to and applied against the excess limitation for the postacquisition part year. For special rule relating to carryovers from taxable years ending before January 1, 1971, to taxable years beginning after December 31, 1970, see subparagraph (6) of this paragraph.
(4) Though considered as two separate taxable years for purposes of this paragraph, the preacquisition part year and the postacquisition part year are treated as one taxable year in determining the years to which an unused credit is carried under section 46(b)(1).
(5) The preceding subparagraphs may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. X Corporation and Y Corporation were organized on January 1, 1971, and each corporation files its return on the calendar year basis. On May 1, 1972, X transfers all its assets to Y in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. X's credit earned and its limitation based on amount of tax for its taxable years 1971 and ending May 1, 1972, are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Limitation
X Corporation's taxable year Credit earned based on amount
of tax------------------------------------------------------------------------1971.................................. $11,000 $5,000Ending 5-1-72......................... 3,000 6,000------------------------------------------------------------------------ Y's credit earned and its limitation based on amount of tax for its taxable years 1971 and 1972 are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Limitation
Y Corporation's taxable year Credit earned based on amount
of tax------------------------------------------------------------------------1971.................................. $7,000 $3,0001972.................................. 3,000 9,000------------------------------------------------------------------------ The sequence for the allowance of unused credits of X Corporation and Y Corporation, and the computation of carryovers to Y Corporation's calendar year 1973, may be illustrated as follows:
(i) X Corporation's 1971 unused credit. The carryover to Y 1973 is $0, computed as follows: Unused credit................................................ $6,000
Excess of X's 5-1-72 limitation based on tax over credit 3,000
earned....................................................
----------Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year 1972.............. 3,000
Excess limitation for Y's postacquisition part year 4,000
($6,000x 244/366).........................................
==========Carryover to Y's year 1973................................... 0
(ii) Y Corporation's 1971 unused credit. The carryover to Y 1973 is $1,000, computed as follows: Unused credit................................................ $4,000
Excess limitation for Y's preacquisition part year 2,000
($6,000x122/ 366).........................................
----------Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year................... 2,000
==========
Excess limitation for Y's postacquisition part year 4,000
($6,000x 244/366).........................................
Less: X's $3,000 carryover from 1971....................... 3,000
----------
1,000
==========
Carryover to Y's year 1973................................. 1,000
(iii) The aggregate of the investment credit carryovers to Y's year 1973 is $1,000, computed as follows: X's 1971 unused credit....................................... 0Y's 1971 unused credit....................................... $1,000
----------
Total.................................................... 1,000
(6) If the year of acquisition is a taxable year beginning after December 31, 1970, and if there is an unused credit of the distributor or transferor corporation or of the acquiring corporation arising in an unused credit year ending before January 1, 1971, which may be carried to such year of acquisition (see paragraph (c)(4) of this section), then in applying subparagraphs (1), (2), and (3) of this paragraph, in lieu of dividing the excess limitation for the year of acquisition between the preacquisition and postacquisition part years, only the limitation based on the amount of tax for such year (i.e., without reduction for the credit earned) shall be divided between the preacquisition and postacquisition part years. If there is also an unused credit arising in an unused credit year ending after December 31, 1970, which may be carried to the year of acquisition, then for the purpose of determining the amount of such unused credit which may be taken into account for such year of acquisition, the credit earned for the year of acquisition shall first be applied against the limitation based on amount of tax for the preacquisition part year (reduced by any investment credit carryovers to such part year from unused credit years ending before January 1, 1971) and the excess, if any, shall then be applied against the limitation based on amount of tax for the postacquisition part year (also reduced by any investment credit carryovers to such part year from unused credit years ending before January 1, 1971).
(7) Subparagraph (6) of this paragraph may be illustrated by the following example:
Example. X Corporation and Y Corporation were organized on January 1, 1970, and each corporation files its return on the calendar year basis. On May 1, 1972, X transfers all its assets to Y in a statutory merger to which section 361 applies. X's credit earned and its limitation based on amount of tax for its taxable years 1970, 1971, and ending May 1, 1972, are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Limitation
X Corporation's taxable year Credit earned based on amount
of tax------------------------------------------------------------------------1970.................................. $3001971.................................. 100Ending 5-1-72......................... 200------------------------------------------------------------------------ Y's credit earned and its limitation based on amount of tax for its taxable years 1970 through 1972 are as follows: ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Limitation
Y Corporation's taxable year Credit earned based on amount
of tax------------------------------------------------------------------------1970.................................. $1001971.................................. 2001972.................................. 300 $900------------------------------------------------------------------------ The sequence for the allowance of unused credits of X Corporation and Y Corporation, and the computation of carryovers to Y Corporation's calendar year 1973, may be illustrated as follows:
(i) X Corporation's 1970 unused credit. The carryover to Y 1973 is $0, computed as follows: Unused credit................................................ $300
==========
X Corporation's 1971 limitation based on tax............... 0
X Corporation's 5-1-72 limitation based on tax............. 0
----------
Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year 1972............ 300
==========
Limitation based on tax for Y's postacquisition part year 600
1972 ($900x244/366).......................................
==========Carryover to Y's year 1973................................... 0
(ii) Y Corporation's 1970 unused credit. The carryover to Y 1973 is $0, computed as follows: Unused credit................................................ $100
Y Corporation's 1971 limitation based on tax............... 0
----------Carryover to Y's preacquisition part year 1972............... 100
==========
Limitation based on tax for Y's preacquisition part year 300
1972 ($900x122/366).......................................
==========Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year 1972.............. 0
(iii) Y Corporation's credit earned for 1972. The carryover to Y 1973 is $0, computed as follows: Credit earned................................................ $300
==========
Limitation based on tax for preacquisition part year 1972 300
($900x122/366)............................................
Less: Y's $100 carryover from 1970......................... 100
----------
$200
==========Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year 1972.............. 100
==========
Limitation based on tax for postacquisition part year 1972 600
($900x244/366)............................................
Less: X's $300 carryover from 1970......................... $300
----------
300
==========Carryover to Y's year 1973................................... 0
(iv) X Corporation's 1971 unused credit. The carryover to Y 1973 is $0, computed as follows: Unused credit................................................ $100
Excess of X's 1972 limitation based on tax over credit 0
earned....................................................
----------Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year 1972.............. 100
Limitation based on tax for postacquisition part year 1972 600
($900x244/366)............................................
==========
Less:
X's $300 carryover from 1970............................. 300
Y's 1972 credit earned for postacquisition part year..... 100
----------
400
==========
200
==========Carryover to Y's year 1973................................... 0
(v) Y Corporation's 1971 unused credit. The carryover to Y 1973 is $100, computed as follows: Unused credit................................................ $200
==========
Limitation based on tax for preacquisition part year 1972 300
($900x122/366)............................................
==========
Less:
Y's $100 carryover from 1970............................. 100
----------
Y's 1972 credit earned for preacquisition part year 1972. 200
----------
300
==========
0
==========Carryover to Y's postacquisition part year................... 200
==========
Limitation based on tax for postacquisition part year 1972 600
($900x244/366)............................................
==========
Less:
X's $300 carryover from 1970............................. 300
Y's 1972 credit earned for postacquisition part year 1972 100
X's $100 carryover from 1971............................. 100
----------
500
==========
100
==========Carryover to Y's year 1973................................... 100
(vi) X Corporation's 5-1-72 unused credit. The carryover to Y 1973 is $200, computed as follows: Unused credit................................................ $200
==========
Limitation based on tax for postacquisition part year 1972 600
($900x244/366)............................................
==========
Less:
X's $300 carryover from 1970............................. 300
Y's 1972 credit earned for postacquisition part year 1972 100
X's $100 carryover from 1971, and Y's $100 carryover from 200
1971....................................................
----------
600
==========
0
==========Carryover to Y's year 1973................................... 200
(vii) The aggregate of the investment credit carryovers to Y 1973 is $300, computed as follows: Y's 1971 unused credit....................................... $100X's 1972 unused credit....................................... 200
----------
Total.................................................... 300
(8) If the year of acquisition is a taxable year to which the limitation provided in Sec. 1.46-2(b)(2) (relating to 20- percent limitation on carryovers and carrybacks to certain taxable years) applies, then for purposes of applying such limitation the preacquisition part year and the postacquisition part year shall each be considered a fractional part of a year, but, if the date of distribution or transfer is not on the last day of a month, the entire month in which the date of distribution or transfer occurs shall be considered as included in the preacquisition part year and no portion thereof shall be considered as included in the postacquisition part year.
(9) If the acquiring corporation succeeds to the investment credit carryovers of two or more distributor or transferor corporations on two or more dates of distribution or transfer during the same taxable year of the acquiring corporation, the manner in which the unused credits of the distributor or transferor corporations shall be applied shall be determined consistently with the rules prescribed in paragraph (c) of Sec. 1.381(c)(1)-2.
(f) Successive acquiring corporations. An acquiring corporation which, in a distribution or transfer to which section 381(a) applies, acquires the assets of a distributor or transferor corporation which previously acquired the assets of another corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies, shall succeed to and take into account, subject to the conditions and limitations of Sec. 1.46-2 and this section, the investment credit carryovers available to the first acquiring corporation under Sec. 1.46-2 and this section.
(g) Recomputation of credit allowed by section 38 on certain property of acquiring corporation. If section 38 property acquired by an acquiring corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies is disposed of, or otherwise ceases to be section 38 property (or becomes public utility property) with respect to the acquiring corporation, before the close of the estimated useful life which was taken into account in computing the distributor or transferor corporation's qualified investment, see paragraph (e) of Sec. 1.47-3.
(h) Electing small business corporation. An unused credit of a distributor or transferor corporation arising in an unused credit year for which such corporation is not an electing small business corporation (as defined in section 1371(b)) may not be carried over in a transaction to which section 381 applies to a taxable year of the acquiring corporation for which such corporation is an electing small business corporation and may not be added to the amount allowable as a credit under section 38 to the shareholders of the acquiring corporation for such taxable year. However, in such a case, a taxable year for which the acquiring corporation is an electing small business corporation shall be counted as a taxable year for purposes of determining the taxable years to which such unused credit may be carried.
(i) [Reserved]
(j) Carryover of operating capacity for qualified intercity bus. For rules for determining an acquiring corporation's qualified investment for the energy credit for a qualified intercity bus, see Sec. 1.48-9(q)(11). (Sec. 38(b) (76 Stat. 963, 26 U.S.C. 38(b)), 48(l)(16) (94 Stat. 264, 26 U.S.C. 48(l)(16)), and 7805 (68A Stat. 917, 26 U.S.C. 7805)) [T.D. 7289, 38 FR 30554, Nov. 6, 1973, as amended by T.D. 7982, 49 FR 39544, Oct. 9, 1984; 49 FR 41246, Oct. 22, 1984] Sec. 1.381(c)(24)-1 Work incentive program credit carryovers in certain corporate acquisitions.
The computation of carryovers and carrybacks of unused WIN credits in a transaction to which section 381 applies shall be made under the principles of Sec. 1.381(c)(23)-1 (relating to the computation of carryovers and carrybacks of unused investment credits), except that the provisions of paragraph (c)(4) and paragraph (e)(6), (7), and (8) of such section shall not apply. (Secs. 381(c)(23), 76 Stat. 971 (26 U.S.C. 381(c)(23), 381(c)(24)) 85 Stat. 557 (26 U.S.C. 381(c)(24)), 7805, 68A Stat. 917 (26 U.S.C. 7805)) [T.D. 7289, 38 FR 30557, Nov. 6, 1973] Sec. 1.381(c)(25)-1 Deficiency dividend of a qualified investment entity.
(a) Carryover requirement. If a distributor or transferor corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies--
(1) Was a qualified investment entity (within the meaning of section 860(b)) for any taxable year ending on or before the date of distribution or transfer, and
(2) A determination (as defined in section 860(e)) establishes that the transferor or distributor corporation is liable for the tax imposed by section 11(a), 56(a), 852(b), 857(b)(1), 857(b)(3)(A), or 1201(a) for such taxable year,then in determining the liability for such tax the deduction described in section 860 shall be allowed pursuant to section 381(c)(25) to such corporation for the amount of deficiency dividends paid by the acquiring corporation with respect to the distributor or transferor corporation. Except as otherwise provided in this section, the provisions of section 860 and the regulations thereunder apply with respect to a deficiency dividend deduction allowable pursuant to section 381(c)(25).
(b) Deficiency dividends paid by the acquiring corporation with respect to the distributor or transferor corporation. A deficiency dividend paid by the acquiring corporation with respect to the distributor or transferor corporation must be a distribution that would satisfy the definition of a deficiency dividend under section 860(f) if paid by the distributor or transferor corporation to its own shareholders. The distribution, however, shall be paid by the acquiring corporation to its own shareholders. The distribution also shall be paid after the date of distribution or transfer and on, or within 90 days after, the date of the determination but before the acquiring corporation files a claim under paragraph (c) of this section.
(c) Claim for deduction. A claim for deduction under this section shall be made by the acquiring corporation on Form 976 and shall be filed within 120 days after the date of the determination. The form shall contain, or be accompanied by, the information required under Sec. 1.860-2(b)(2) in sufficient detail to properly identify the facts with respect to the distributor or transferor corporation and the acquiring corporation. The required certified copy of the resolution authorizing the payment of the dividend shall be that of the trustees, board of directors, or other authority, of the acquiring corporation. Necessary changes may be made in Form 976 in order to carry out the provisions of this paragraph. The claim shall be filed with the district director, or director of the internal revenue service center, with whom the return of the distributor or transferor corporation to which the claim relates was filed.
(d) Effect on dividends paid deduction. A deficiency dividend paid by the acquiring corporation that is allowable as a deduction to a distributor or transferor corporation pursuant to section 381(c)(25) shall not become a part of the dividends paid deduction of the acquiring corporation under section 561 for any taxable year.
(e) Successive transactions to which section 381(a) applies. The provisions of this section shall apply in the case of successive transactions to which section 381(a) applies. Thus, if X corporation transfers its assets to Y corporation in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies and if Y corporation transfers its assets to Z corporation in a subsequent transaction to which section 381(a) applies, then, subject to the provisions of this section, X corporation may take a deficiency dividend deduction for the amount of deficiency dividends paid by Z corporation with respect to X corporation. (Sec. 860(l) (92 Stat. 2849, 26 U.S.C. 860(l)); sec. 860(g) (92 Stat. 2850, 26 U.S.C. 860(g)); and sec. 7805 (68A Stat. 917, 26 U.S.C. 7805)) [T.D. 7767, 46 FR 11264, Feb. 6, 1981, as amended by T.D. 7936, 49 FR 2106, Jan. 18, 1984] Sec. 1.381(c)(26)-1 Credit for employment of certain new employees.
(a) Carryovers and carrybacks. For taxable years beginning before January 1, 1984, the computation of carryovers and carrybacks of unused targeted jobs credit (new jobs credit in the case of wages paid before 1979) under section 44B (as in effect prior to enactment of the Tax Reform Act of 1984) in a transaction to which section 381(a) applies shall be made under the principles of Sec. 1.381(c)(23)-1 (relating to the computation of carryovers and carrybacks of unused investment credit), except that the provisions of paragraph (c)(4) and paragraph (e)(6), (7) and (8) of such section shall not apply.
(b) Other items. See Sec. 1.51-1(h) for a rule that applies to certain transfers of a trade or business in which a member of a targeted group is employed. [T.D. 8062, 50 FR 46003, Nov. 6, 1985] Sec. 1.381(d)-1 Operations loss carryovers of life insurance companies.
For the application of part V, subchapter C, chapter 1 of the Code to operations loss carryovers of life insurance companies, see section 812(f) and Sec. 1.812-7 and section 381(c)(22) and Sec. 1.381(c)(22)-1. [T.D. 6625, 27 FR 12543, Dec. 19, 1962]